[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2023066008A1 - Activity management method and electronic device - Google Patents

Activity management method and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023066008A1
WO2023066008A1 PCT/CN2022/122774 CN2022122774W WO2023066008A1 WO 2023066008 A1 WO2023066008 A1 WO 2023066008A1 CN 2022122774 W CN2022122774 W CN 2022122774W WO 2023066008 A1 WO2023066008 A1 WO 2023066008A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
activity
schedule
user
working
configuration information
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2022/122774
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王治文
李广生
欧建深
吴金娴
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2023066008A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023066008A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B15/00Systems controlled by a computer
    • G05B15/02Systems controlled by a computer electric
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02Programme-control systems electric
    • G05B19/04Programme control other than numerical control, i.e. in sequence controllers or logic controllers
    • G05B19/042Programme control other than numerical control, i.e. in sequence controllers or logic controllers using digital processors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G05CONTROLLING; REGULATING
    • G05BCONTROL OR REGULATING SYSTEMS IN GENERAL; FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS OF SUCH SYSTEMS; MONITORING OR TESTING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SUCH SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
    • G05B19/00Programme-control systems
    • G05B19/02Programme-control systems electric
    • G05B19/418Total factory control, i.e. centrally controlling a plurality of machines, e.g. direct or distributed numerical control [DNC], flexible manufacturing systems [FMS], integrated manufacturing systems [IMS] or computer integrated manufacturing [CIM]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06QINFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES; SYSTEMS OR METHODS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR ADMINISTRATIVE, COMMERCIAL, FINANCIAL, MANAGERIAL OR SUPERVISORY PURPOSES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • G06Q10/00Administration; Management
    • G06Q10/10Office automation; Time management

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of terminal and communication technologies, and in particular to an activity management method and electronic equipment.
  • the application provides an activity management method and an electronic device, which realizes associating one or more smart devices by setting a schedule event, and provides users with a smart life experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an activity management method, the method includes: the first control device obtains the first schedule activity, the first schedule activity includes the first configuration information of the first working equipment, and the first configuration information uses To control the first working device to perform a first operation related to the first schedule activity; the first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device for execution.
  • control device is used to obtain the schedule activity set by the user, and send configuration information related to the schedule activity to the working device.
  • the working device is used to receive the configuration information, and provide the corresponding home service for the user according to the configuration information. It can be seen that users can control the work of electronic devices in the home by posting schedule activities, facilitate user operations, provide users with a full-scenario digital life experience, and enhance user experience.
  • schedule activities can refer to family, work, medical care, logistics, agriculture, transportation, security, construction, energy, manufacturing, retail, automatic driving, multi-device management, expert systems, automatic decision-making systems and other application scenarios
  • the plan and arrangement of the user at a certain time node or time period, while the control equipment and working equipment are the electronic equipment involved in the corresponding application scenarios.
  • the schedule activities can be activities related to the daily life of family members
  • the control device can be a terminal device carried by family members, such as a mobile phone
  • the work device can be a smart home, such as a TV, computer, desk lamp , air purifiers, smart speakers, robot vacuums, refrigerators, etc.
  • the method further includes: the first control device acquires a second schedule event, the second schedule event is a schedule event set by the first user on the first control device, or, the second schedule event It is a schedule activity acquired by the first control device from the second control device, or, the second schedule activity is a schedule activity generated by the first control device by collecting information of an application program.
  • users can publish multiple schedule activities on the control device, control the work of multiple different devices, help users better manage and arrange schedule activities, and control each electronic device in the home to assist or lead the completion of schedule activity responses to help users manage their families better, or the schedule activity can also be a schedule activity obtained by the control device from other control devices, so that multiple family members in a family can publish schedule activities through different control devices,
  • the control device can centrally obtain and display the schedule activities released by all family members, which is convenient for users to operate.
  • the control device in addition to users actively publishing schedule activities on the control device, can also automatically generate schedule activities based on the information on the application. Automatically generate a schedule event based on the information of this online course.
  • the method further includes: when the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity, the first control device reminds the first user, or, adjusts the first schedule activity or the second schedule activity Activity.
  • the control device can display a prompt message to remind the user that there is a conflict between the schedule activities set by the user, and the user can further adjust the conflicting schedule activities according to the prompt information, or the control device can automatically adjust Conflicting schedule activities.
  • the first scheduled event corresponds to the first time
  • the second scheduled event corresponds to the second time
  • the first control device reminds the first scheduled event A user, specifically including: when the first time overlaps with the second time, and the user object associated with the first schedule activity overlaps with the user object associated with the second schedule activity, the first control device displays prompt information; or In the case that the first time overlaps with the second time, and the attribute of the first schedule activity conflicts with the attribute of the second schedule activity, the first control device displays prompt information.
  • the control device can display a prompt message, indicating that there is a conflict in the scheduled activities: the activity time of different scheduled activities overlaps and involves the same active object (that is, the user object), or, different Scheduled activities have overlapping activity times and conflicting activity attributes.
  • the activity object refers to the user related to the activity, or the user who executes the activity
  • the activity attribute refers to the category to which the activity belongs.
  • the activity attribute can include: sleep, study, work, entertainment, cleaning, etc., for example, two
  • a schedule activity conflict may refer to that one schedule activity belongs to a learning activity, and the other schedule activity belongs to an entertainment activity.
  • the second schedule activity includes second configuration information of the second working device; if the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity, the first control device displays prompt information, or , the first control device adjusts the first schedule activity or the second schedule activity, specifically including: there is overlap between the first time and the second time, and the first working equipment and the second working equipment are the same equipment, and the first If the configuration information is different from the second configuration information, the first control device displays prompt information, or the first control device adjusts the first configuration information or the second configuration information.
  • the conflict between the two schedule activities can also mean that the activity time of the two schedule activities overlaps and involves different configuration information of the same working device.
  • the control device can display prompt information or adjust one of the schedules The configuration information involved in the activity, so as to avoid work conflicts in the work equipment, and help the work equipment to better complete the schedule activities arranged by the user.
  • the first schedule activity further includes third configuration information of the third working device, and the third configuration information is used to control the third working device to perform a second operation related to the first schedule activity.
  • a schedule activity may contain configuration information for multiple devices, and a user may control multiple devices by setting a schedule activity.
  • the first schedule activity further includes third configuration information of the third working device, and in the case that the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity, the first control device adjusts the first schedule activities or second scheduled activities, specifically including: when the first time overlaps with the second time and the first configuration information affects the second scheduled activity, the first control device adjusts the first configuration information; or When the first time overlaps with the second time and the third configuration information affects the second schedule activity, the first control device adjusts the second configuration information.
  • the configuration information of a working device for a schedule activity affects another schedule activity, which may refer to whether the working device works according to the configuration information, which will conflict with or interfere with another schedule activity.
  • the conflict may refer to a time conflict, It involves different configuration information of the same device, involves using one activity member, activities involving different activity attributes, etc.
  • Interference can refer to volume interference, distance interference, logical interference, etc. For example, in a schedule event, entertainment If the volume when the equipment is working interferes with the study of family members in another scheduled activity, the previous scheduled activity will have an impact on the latter scheduled activity. That is to say, when part of the activity content in one scheduled activity conflicts or interferes with another scheduled activity, the control device can only change the part of the activity content. In this way, it can be ensured to the greatest extent that the working device performs corresponding work according to the schedule activities arranged by the user.
  • the first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device for execution, specifically including: when the first control device obtains the first schedule activity, sending the first configuration information to to the first working device; or after the first working device is online, the first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device after receiving the acquisition request from the first working device.
  • control device can send the configuration information to the corresponding working device immediately after receiving the configuration information, so as to ensure that the working device works in time according to the configuration information issued by the user, or, after the working device goes online,
  • the request sent by the device is to obtain the configuration information, and the configuration information is sent to the working device to avoid missing the configuration information sent by the user when the working device is offline and then online again, and to ensure the normal operation of the working device in time.
  • the first configuration information includes working time and working parameters of the first working device, and the working parameters include one or more of the following: volume, temperature, range, distance, working mode or brightness.
  • control device can set the configuration information of the working device by setting the working time and working parameters of the working device, so as to control the working device to work according to the working time and working parameters.
  • the acquisition of the first schedule by the first control device specifically includes: the first control device detects the first setting of the user on the first setting interface, and the first setting includes: the first setting of the schedule At the first time, the first configuration information of the first working device; the first control device sets the first schedule activity, and the first schedule activity includes the first setting on the first setting interface.
  • control device can display a user interface for the user to complete the setting of the configuration information of the working device.
  • the first setting further includes selecting a second user associated with the first scheduled event, and the method further includes: after setting the first scheduled event, the first control device reminds the second user.
  • the control device can send prompt information to other devices to remind the user that the schedule activity related to it is about to be carried out or has been carried out, and the user corresponding to the other device is the user related to the schedule activity .
  • the method further includes: the first control device displays a second user interface, and the second user interface displays a plurality of scheduled activities, where the plurality of scheduled activities include the first scheduled event and the second scheduled event.
  • control device can display an activity list, the activity list includes multiple scheduled activities set by the user, and the user can view and manage the status of the scheduled activities through the activity list.
  • the first schedule activity is: cleaning, studying, cooking, traveling, sleeping, entertaining or working.
  • the above-mentioned first schedule activity is cleaning, learning, cooking, travel, sleep, entertainment or work as several schedule activities listed in the home application scenario.
  • the first schedule activity It can also be other activities.
  • the first schedule activity can also be activities such as work, rest, meeting, business trip, check-in, and report.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, including: an electronic device, which is characterized in that it includes a memory, one or more processors, and one or more programs; one or more processors are executing One or more programs are used to make the electronic device execute the method described in the first aspect or any implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, and when the instructions are run on the electronic device, the computer executes the method described in the first aspect or any implementation manner of the first aspect .
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when running on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method described in the first aspect or any implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • FIG. 1 is a user interface involved in a device control method
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a schedule activity list in a smart home application scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 5A- Figure 5D, Figure 6A- Figure 6H, Figure 7A- Figure 7J, Figure 8A- Figure 8B, Figure 9A- Figure 9G, Figure 10A- Figure 10B are some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of this application;
  • FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 , and FIG. 13 are schematic flowcharts related to the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • first and second are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as “first” and “second” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the “multiple” The meaning is two or more.
  • UI user interface
  • the term "user interface (UI)” in the following embodiments of this application is a medium interface for interaction and information exchange between an application program or an operating system and a user, and it realizes the difference between the internal form of information and the form acceptable to the user. conversion between.
  • the user interface is the source code written in a specific computer language such as java and extensible markup language (XML).
  • the source code of the interface is parsed and rendered on the electronic device, and finally presented as content that can be recognized by the user.
  • the commonly used form of user interface is the graphical user interface (graphic user interface, GUI), which refers to the user interface related to computer operation displayed in a graphical way. It may be text, icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, Widgets, and other visible interface elements displayed on the display screen of the electronic device.
  • Fig. 1 exemplarily shows a user interface involved in a device control method.
  • the user interface shown in FIG. 1 is used to centrally set and manage the work of each electronic device in the home.
  • the user interface includes one or more equipment options, and the one or more equipment options respectively correspond to one or more electronic equipment involved in the family, and the electronic equipment may refer to smart door locks, televisions, cameras, body Fat scales, smart table lamps, electric kettles, refrigerators, air purifiers, air conditioners, sweeping robots, etc.
  • the user can change the configuration information of the one or more electronic devices through the user interface, and control the work of the one or more electronic devices, for example, setting the sweeping robot to clean the living room in the morning. In this way, the user can control the electronic device in the home through the user interface, so that the electronic device can complete the activities arranged by the user, and help the user manage the family better.
  • the device control method can centrally manage the electronic devices in the home, and the user can remotely control the work of each electronic device in the home with only one electronic device, such as a mobile phone.
  • this method still requires the user to arrange the configuration information of each electronic device, and the user cannot intuitively know the working status of each electronic device, nor can it uniformly control the work of each electronic device according to its own activity arrangement, which is not smart enough. Therefore, how to simplify the user's operation and help the user to better control the work of multiple electronic devices in the home is an urgent problem to be solved at present.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides an activity management method, which is applied to control equipment and working equipment.
  • the control device can obtain the schedule activity input by the user, and the schedule activity can include the configuration information of the working device, and the control device can send the configuration information to the working device, so that the working device can perform the operation according to the configuration information. Work.
  • the user here refers to one or more family members in the family, that is to say, the user can refer to one or more users, and the one or more users can log in on the control device with a user account respectively Add a schedule activity, and synchronize the schedule activity to other users' control devices, and the control device can centrally display all schedule activities.
  • the user can publish the schedule activities through his mobile phone, and other users in his family can also view the schedule activities synchronously, that is, the one or more users can share and view the schedule activities.
  • the control device or work device may be one or more electronic devices involved in the home.
  • the control device can be used to obtain the schedule activities, and send the configuration information in the schedule activities to the working device.
  • the control device can be a mobile device such as a mobile phone, a tablet, or a computer.
  • Work equipment can be used to receive configuration information and provide users with services related to this activity.
  • the work equipment can refer to smart home and mobile devices that provide users with home services, such as mobile phones, earphones, tablets, bracelets, watches, smart glasses , TV, computer, desk lamp, air purifier, smart speaker, sweeping robot, refrigerator, etc.
  • the configuration information can be used to indicate the working status of the working device.
  • the configuration information may include: working time and working parameters, wherein the working parameters may include but not limited to parameters such as volume, temperature, range, distance, working mode or brightness.
  • the parameters included in the configuration information of different working devices may be different, and the specific configuration information about the working device is determined by the services provided by the working device.
  • the parameters of the sweeping robot may include: working time, range, working mode, etc.
  • the parameters of the smart desk lamp may include: working time, brightness, working mode, etc.
  • the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application can centrally display the schedule activities published by all members of the family, and help all family members in the family to better understand the schedule activities in the family, and the user By publishing activities, you can control the work of one or more electronic devices in the home, facilitate user operations, provide users with a full-scenario digital life experience, and improve user experience.
  • the activity management method can not only acquire multiple schedule activities input by the user, but also generate schedule activities according to the information acquired by the control device. For example, when the control device acquires that the user has reserved a network Course, the control device can automatically generate a schedule activity according to the information of the network course. For details on how to obtain schedule events, please refer to the follow-up content, so I won’t go into details here.
  • the working device can also adjust the conflicting activities in the schedule activities, so as to avoid work conflicts of the working device.
  • the schedule activity also includes: activity attribute and activity priority.
  • the activity attributes are used to classify the schedule activities and indicate the types of the schedule activities.
  • the activity attributes may include: sleep, study, travel, cooking, work, entertainment, cleaning and so on.
  • the activity priority is used to sort the execution order of each schedule activity, for example, the schedule activity with high priority is executed first, and the schedule activity with low priority is delayed or not executed.
  • different activity priorities may be set for different activity attributes, for example, the priorities of sleep, study, travel, cooking, work, entertainment, and cleaning are from high to low.
  • FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication system 1000 involved in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 1000 includes one or more electronic devices in the home, and the one or more electronic devices include mobile devices carried by users, such as mobile phones, earphones, tablets, bracelets, watches, smart phones, etc. Glasses, etc., as well as smart home appliances placed in the home, such as TVs, computers, desk lamps, air purifiers, smart speakers, sweeping robots, refrigerators, etc.
  • the one or more electronic devices can be divided into two types of devices: one is a control device that sends configuration information, and the other is a working device that receives configuration information.
  • control device is used to receive the schedule activities input by the user, determine conflicting scenarios according to the schedule activities, adjust the execution sequence of the schedule activities, establish communication connections with the working equipment, send configuration information to the working equipment, and control the work of the working equipment.
  • the control device can include one or more devices, that is, one or more family members can add schedule activities on the control device with their own user accounts logged in, and the one or more family members can share and view these schedules through their respective control devices Activity.
  • the control device may refer to a user-oriented terminal device, such as a mobile phone, a tablet, a computer, and the like.
  • the communication connection may be a wired connection or a wireless connection.
  • the wireless connection may be a high-fidelity wireless communication (Wi-Fi) connection, a Bluetooth connection, an infrared connection, an NFC connection, a ZigBee connection, or a short-distance connection.
  • the wireless connection may also be a long-distance connection, and the long-distance connection includes but is not limited to mobile networks supporting 2G, 3G, 4G, 5G and subsequent standard protocols. For example, multiple electronic devices can log in to the same user account (such as a Huawei account), and then connect remotely through the server.
  • the working device is used to receive the configuration information issued by the control device, adjust the working status according to the configuration information, and provide users with targeted home services under different schedule activities.
  • the working device may include one or more devices, which may refer to smart home and mobile devices that provide home services for users, such as mobile phones, earphones, tablets, bracelets, watches, smart glasses, TVs, computers, desk lamps, Air purifiers, smart speakers, robot vacuums, refrigerators, and more.
  • the electronic devices 1011-1015 exemplarily shown in FIG. 2 are working devices, which are respectively: smart speakers, sweeping robots, smart desk lamps, tablets, and watches.
  • Electronic devices 1021-1023 are control devices.
  • Electronic devices 1021-1023 can be Mobile phones of different family members, such as father, mother and children.
  • control device can also be the working device at the same time, and the working device can also be the control device at the same time.
  • the classification of the control device and the working device here is only to describe the solution more clearly, and does not constitute a limitation to the embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 2 shows the communication system 1000 as an example only. In other embodiments of the present application, the communication system 1000 may include more or less electronic devices, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may be a cell phone, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a handheld computer, a notebook computer, an ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), a netbook, as well as a cellular phone, a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant) digital assistant (PDA), augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) device, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) device, wearable device, vehicle-mounted device, smart home device and/or
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • augmented reality augmented reality, AR
  • VR virtual reality
  • artificial intelligence artificial intelligence
  • wearable device wearable device
  • vehicle-mounted device smart home device
  • smart home device smart home device
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific type of the electronic equipment.
  • the electronic device 100 is the control device mentioned in the above-mentioned communication system 1000. For the specific description of the control device, please refer to the foregoing content, which will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device can be a portable terminal device equipped with iOS, Android, Microsoft or other operating systems, such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wearable device, etc., or a laptop computer (Laptop) with a touch-sensitive surface or a touch panel, Non-portable terminal devices such as desktop computers with touch-sensitive surfaces or touch panels.
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and A subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller video codec
  • digital signal processor digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • neural network processor neural-network processing unit
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.
  • the processor 110 may be configured to determine whether there is a conflicting schedule activity according to the schedule activity input by the user, or, further, according to information collected by the electronic device 100 or information collected by other electronic devices connected to the electronic device 100 Generate schedule activities to judge whether there are conflicting scenarios combined with the schedule activities input by the user, and control the working status of the working equipment according to the priority of the activities.
  • the working device refer to the foregoing content, which will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 100 obtaining the schedule activity, judging the conflicting schedule activity, and controlling the working device please refer to the subsequent content, and will not repeat it here.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory.
  • the memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.
  • the charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger.
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas.
  • Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100.
  • System global navigation satellite system, GNSS
  • frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
  • near field communication technology near field communication, NFC
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , demodulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the two communication modules, the mobile communication module 150 and the wireless communication module 160 can be used to establish communication connections with other control devices and working devices, send the schedule activities obtained on the electronic device 100 to other control devices, and receive other Control the schedule activities obtained on the device, send configuration information to the working device, receive instructions from the working device requesting to obtain configuration information, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like.
  • the display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED active matrix organic light emitting diode
  • FLED flexible light-emitting diode
  • Miniled MicroLed, Micro-oLed
  • quantum dot light emitting diodes quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED),
  • the display screen 194 can be used to display the user interface involved in the activity management method, for example, display a user interface that prompts the user to input a schedule activity, a user interface that displays a list of schedule activities, etc., specifically about the display screen 194
  • display a user interface that prompts the user to input a schedule activity a user interface that displays a list of schedule activities, etc., specifically about the display screen 194
  • For the displayed user interface refer to subsequent UI embodiments, and details will not be described here.
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • the ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals.
  • the camera 193 can be used to collect the user's avatar for the user to create a family member account, or collect the account QR code of the family member, or the family QR code for the user to add other members to the family, Or join a family.
  • the camera 193 can be used to collect the user's avatar for the user to create a family member account, or collect the account QR code of the family member, or the family QR code for the user to add other members to the family, Or join a family.
  • the internal memory 121 may include one or more random access memories (random access memory, RAM) and one or more non-volatile memories (non-volatile memory, NVM).
  • RAM random access memory
  • NVM non-volatile memory
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external non-volatile memory, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal.
  • Speaker 170A also referred to as a "horn” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • Receiver 170B also called “earpiece”, is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone”, is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones.
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 may use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes).
  • the distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes.
  • the light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the touch sensor 180K is also called "touch device”.
  • the touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 .
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like.
  • the key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder.
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card.
  • the activity management method can involve one or more home devices in the family, including: mobile phones, computers, tablets, bracelets, watches, smart desk lamps, refrigerators, air conditioners, air purifiers, smart Speakers, sweeping robots, etc.
  • the activity management method can obtain multiple schedule activities and control the working status of the one or more home devices. Further, according to the priority of the activities, the activities with higher priority among the conflicting activities are executed first, and the schedule activities avoid the family devices. There is a problem of work conflict, which facilitates the user's operation and improves the user's home experience.
  • Fig. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a schedule activity list in a smart home application scenario.
  • the daily activities can include: housework, consumption, travel, self-discipline, safety and other activities. Among them, it can specifically include: cleaning, watering, dining, catering management, activity monitoring, schedule arrangement, family safety management and other activities.
  • These activities can be divided into uncontrolled children's activities, controlled children's activities and super terminal activities. Among them, uncontrolled children's activities are activities that do not require other people's intervention, controlled children's activities are activities that require other people's intervention, and super terminal activities are activities in which one or more home devices in the family play a leading role.
  • the activity management method can be used to centrally manage these activities through electronic devices, reduce the probability of schedule activity conflicts, and create a full-scenario intelligent digital life experience for the family.
  • the activity management method may involve one or more office equipment in the company, including: mobile phones, computers, drinking fountains, printers, lamps, projectors, air conditioners, cameras and so on.
  • the activity management method can obtain multiple work activities, wherein the user can refer to company employees, visitors or other personnel, and the work activities can include: meeting arrangement, water refill, electrical appliance repair, visitor reminder, meeting reminder, security monitoring, temperature Adjustment and other activities, the activity management method can control the working status of the one or more office equipment according to the work activities set by the user, and further, according to the priority of the activity, give priority to the execution of conflicting activities, the one with the higher priority Activities, so that each office equipment can work in an orderly manner without conflict, facilitate the user's operation, and enhance the user's office experience.
  • this activity management method can involve one or more medical devices in the hospital, including: mobile phones, computers, display screens, speakers, lathes, intercom signals, multi-function monitors, water dispensers etc.
  • the activity management method can acquire a plurality of medical activities input by the user, wherein the user may refer to a doctor, nurse, patient, or other personnel, and the medical activities may include: registration, medical treatment, registration, emergency treatment, medicine collection, payment,
  • the activity management method can control the working status of the one or more medical devices according to the schedule activities set by the user. Further, according to the priority of the activity, the conflicting activities are prioritized, and the priority is higher.
  • the activity enables each medical device to work in an orderly manner without conflicts, facilitates the user's operation, and improves the user's experience of finding a job or seeing a doctor in the hospital based on this activity.
  • 5A-5D schematically illustrate some user interfaces involved in creating a family member account by the electronic device 100 .
  • FIG. 5A exemplarily shows the default user interface 21 provided by the application when the user opens the distributed calendar application for the first time.
  • the distributed schedule application is used to provide users with a user interface for inputting schedule activities, obtain the schedule activities input by users, or generate schedule activities according to the obtained information, receive schedule activities sent by other devices, etc., and based on the obtained The schedule activities are used to determine whether there are conflicting schedule activities. If there are, the working status of each device in the schedule activities is adjusted according to the priority of the activities, and the schedule activities arranged in the family are displayed.
  • the distributed schedule application is used to centrally manage schedule activities, control the working status of each electronic device in the home, enable each electronic device to perform its own duties, and provide users with comprehensive and humanized smart life services.
  • the user interface 21 is used to prompt the user to create a family member account.
  • the user interface 21 may include: a menu bar 211 and an account creation control 212 .
  • the menu bar 211 may include: home page option 211A, schedule option 211B, and my option 211C. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 5A , when the text in an option is underlined, it means that the option is selected. Wherein, when the homepage option 211A is in the selected state, the user interface 21 is used to display the subpage corresponding to the homepage option 211A, and the subpage is used to display the working equipment that has established a communication connection with the electronic device 100.
  • the user interface 21 is used to display the subpage corresponding to the schedule option 211B, and the subpage is used to display the schedule activities.
  • the user interface 21 is used to display the subpage corresponding to the option 211C.
  • This subpage is used to display information related to the account.
  • the My option 211C is selected.
  • the account creation control 212 displayed in the user interface 21 is used to prompt the user to create a family member account.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the account creation control 212 , the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 22 as shown in FIG. 5B .
  • the electronic device 100 may detect a user's touch operation on the icon of the distributed schedule application, and in response to the operation, open the distributed schedule application, wherein the icon may be displayed on the desktop of the electronic device 100, It may also be an icon located in a user interface provided by a setting application, or an icon in a drop-down menu bar.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect a user's voice command for opening the distributed calendar application, and respond to the voice command to open the distributed calendar application.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the way to start the distributed schedule application.
  • the user interface 22 may include: a return control 221 and an information input window 222 .
  • the information input window 222 is used to input the name of the account, such as "180XXXXXXX".
  • the electronic device 100 may use the information filled in the information input window 222 as the account name of the family member created by the user after receiving the user's touch operation on the return control 221 .
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 23 as shown in FIG. 5C , where the user interface 23 is used to set the avatar of the account.
  • the user interface 23 may include: a cancel control 231 , a confirmation control 232 , and a picture selection area 233 .
  • the cancel control 231 is used to cancel setting the profile picture of the account
  • the confirmation control 232 is used to confirm the profile picture of the account set by the user
  • the picture selection area 233 is used to select the profile picture of the account.
  • the picture selection area 233 may include a camera icon 233A, a first picture 233B, and a second picture 233C.
  • the camera icon 233A may receive a user's touch operation, and turn on the camera in response to the operation, and the user may immediately take a photo as the avatar of the account.
  • the first picture 233B and the second picture 233C may be pictures included in the gallery application, and the user may select the picture corresponding to the first picture 233B or the second picture 233C as the avatar of the account.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 24 shown in FIG. 5D after the account is created.
  • the user interface 24 is used to display the two-dimensional code of the account number of the family member created by the user, that is, the two-dimensional code 241.
  • the user can show the two-dimensional code to other users for future use.
  • Other users add the account created by the user to the family.
  • the electronic device 100 can also scan the QR code of the other user to add the account of the other user to the family it is in.
  • FIG. 5A-FIG. 5D show the process of creating a family member account by the electronic device 100, so that the user can view and manage schedule activities through the account, providing intelligent management for the user.
  • the electronic device 100 can form a group based on the account and accounts created by other users. This group is a family. Each user in the family can arrange schedule activities on his own electronic device, and each user in the family can share and view these scheduled events.
  • 6A-6H exemplarily show some user interfaces involved in creating and managing families by the electronic device 100 .
  • the user interface 31 is used to create the name of the family.
  • the user interface 31 may include: a return control 311 and an information input window 312 .
  • the return control 311 is used to quit setting the name of the family
  • the information input in the information input window 312 is used as the name of the family.
  • the user may input "a family that loves each other" in the information input window 312 as the name of the family.
  • the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 32 as shown in FIG. 6B .
  • the user interface 32 can be used to prompt the user to further manage the household.
  • the user interface 32 may include: a return control 321 and a setting window 322 .
  • the return control 321 can be used to exit the user interface 32 and return to the upper level page or the main page of the distributed schedule application.
  • Settings window 322 may include: an invite option 322A and a settings option 322B. Among them, the invitation option 322A can be used to invite other users to join the family, and the setting option 322B can be used to set the information of the family.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's touch operation on the invite option 322A in FIG. 6B , and in response to the operation, display the user interface 33 as shown in FIG. 6C .
  • the user interface 33 may include: a return control 331 , a two-dimensional code 332 , an information input area 333 , a code scanning icon 334 , and a confirmation control 335 .
  • the return control 331 can be used to exit the user interface 33 and return to the upper level page (such as the user interface 32 ) or the main page of the distributed schedule application.
  • the QR code 332 is the family QR code corresponding to the family, and the user can show the family QR code to other users so that other users can join the family.
  • the information input area 333 can be used for the user to input the mobile phone number of other users, so that the electronic device 100 can add other users to the family according to the mobile phone number, or the electronic device 100 can detect the user's touch on the code scanning icon 334 Operation, in response to the operation, turn on the camera, collect the QR codes (such as the QR code 241 shown in FIG. 5D ) of family member accounts created by other users through the camera, and add other users to the family.
  • a confirmation control 335 may be used to complete the family member's invitation.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect a user's touch operation on the setting option 322B in FIG. 6B , and in response to the operation, display the user interface 34 as shown in FIG. 6D .
  • the user interface 34 may include: a return control 341 , a list of family members 342 , and an information display window 343 .
  • the return control 341 can be used to exit the user interface 34 and return to the upper level page (such as the user interface 32 ) or the main page of the distributed schedule application.
  • the family member list 342 can be used to display the family members contained in the family, wherein the family member list 342 can include a member icon 342A and an invitation icon 342B.
  • the member icon 342A may be an account created by the user corresponding to the electronic device 100, and the member icon 342A may display an account avatar and account name, and the invitation icon 342B may be used to invite other users to enter the family.
  • the information display window 343 is used to display relevant information of the family, wherein the information display window 343C may include: a family name 343A, a family QR code 343B and a nickname 343C.
  • the family name 343A is used to display and set the name of the family
  • the family QR code 343B is used to trigger the display of the family’s QR code for other users to scan the QR code to enter the family
  • the nickname 343C can be used to display and set the user name. A nickname within the family.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's touch operation on the home QR code 343B in FIG. 6D , and in response to the operation, display the user interface 35 as shown in FIG. 6E .
  • the user interface 35 is used to display the family QR code.
  • the user interface 35 may include a return control 351 and a two-dimensional code 352 .
  • the return control 351 can be used to exit the user interface 35 and return to the previous page (such as the user interface 34).
  • the two-dimensional code 352 is used to display the two-dimensional code corresponding to the family, and the user can show the two-dimensional code to other users or send the two-dimensional code to other users for other users to join the family.
  • the electronic device 100 may also detect the user's touch operation on the nickname 343C in FIG. 6D , and in response to the operation, display the user interface 36 as shown in FIG. 6F .
  • This user interface 36 is used to modify the user's nickname within the family.
  • the user interface 36 may include: a return control 361 and an information input window 362 .
  • the return control 361 can be used to exit the user interface 36 and return to the previous page (such as the user interface 34 ).
  • Information entry window 362 may be used to enter the user's nickname within the household.
  • the user can fill in the name according to the role he plays in the family, for example, "father”, “mother”, “son”, “daughter” and so on.
  • the user may input "Dad” in the information input window 362 as the user's nickname in the family.
  • Figure 6G shows a user interface 37 showing family information, through which the user can modify family-related information, for example, invite or remove family members, set the family name, user's nickname in the family, whether to display group member nicknames, Break up the family and so on.
  • family-related information for example, invite or remove family members, set the family name, user's nickname in the family, whether to display group member nicknames, Break up the family and so on.
  • the user interface 37 may include: a return control 371 , a list of family members 372 , and an information display window 373 .
  • the return control 371 can be used to exit the user interface 37 and return to the upper level page or the main page of the distributed schedule application.
  • Family member list 372 The family member list 342 can be used to display the family members included in the family.
  • the family member list 372 may include a first member icon 372A, a second member icon 372B, a third member icon 372C, an invite icon 372D, and a remove icon 372E. Wherein, the first member icon 372A, the second member icon 372B and the third member icon 372C represent three family members in the family respectively.
  • invitation icon 372D may be used to invite other users into the home.
  • Remove icon 372E may be used to remove a user from the household.
  • the information display window 373 can be used to display relevant information of the family. Wherein, the information display window 373 may include: a family name 373A, a family QR code 373B, a nickname 373C, a nickname display switch 373D, and a disbanding family control 373E.
  • the family name 373A is used to display and set the name of the family
  • the family QR code 373B is used to trigger the display of the family’s QR code
  • the nickname 373C can be used to display and set the user’s nickname in the family
  • the nickname display switch 373D is used to Set whether to display the nicknames set by family members in the family
  • the disbanding family control 373E can be used to trigger disbanding the family.
  • the electronic device 100 When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the remove icon 372E in FIG. 6G , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 37 as shown in FIG. 6H .
  • a delete icon 3721B is added to the second member icon 372B, and an icon 3721C is added to the third member icon 372C.
  • the delete icon 3721B or the delete icon 3721C may detect a user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, the user corresponding to the second member icon 372B or the user corresponding to the third member icon 372C is removed from the family.
  • Figures 6A-6H show the process of creating and managing a family through the distributed calendar application after the user has created the account.
  • the user can invite other family members to enter the family after the family is created, or accept other family members. User's invitation to enter other families.
  • a family can contain multiple family members, and a family member can enter multiple families. In this way, the user can centrally manage the schedule activities of multiple family members in a group manner, providing the user with a convenient management service of schedule activities.
  • 7A-7J illustrate some user interfaces involved in adding and managing devices.
  • the user interface 41 may include: a menu bar 211 , more options 411 , and a device display area 412 .
  • the menu bar 211 may include three options: a home page option 211A, a schedule option 211B, and a my option 211C.
  • a home page option 211A a home page option 211A
  • a schedule option 211B a schedule option 211B
  • a my option 211C For a specific description of the menu bar 211, reference may be made to the relevant content in the foregoing FIG. 5A, and details are not repeated here. It can be seen from FIG. 7A that the homepage option 211A is selected, and the user interface 41 is used to display the subpage corresponding to the homepage option 211A.
  • the more options 411 in the user interface 41 can be used to trigger the display of more setting options, and the device display area 412 can be used to display the working devices with which the electronic device 100 has established a communication connection.
  • Classify and arrange, as shown in FIG. 7A two wristwatches and mobile phones added by the electronic device 100 are portable devices.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a setting window 413 in the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 7B .
  • the setting window 413 may include: an add device option 413A, a scene creation option 413B, and a scan option 413C.
  • the add equipment option 413A can be used to establish a communication connection with the work equipment, add the work equipment to the equipment display area 412, and the create scene option 413B can be used to trigger the creation of life scenes, and the user can create multiple schedule activities in different life scenes , to help users better classify their schedule activities.
  • life scenes can include: home care scenes, pet scenes, and elderly scenes. Among them, home care scenes are used for users to set up some daily activities that are close to life, such as three meals, work schedules, Cleaning, travel and other activities.
  • the pet scene is used for users to set some activities related to taking care of pets, such as cleaning, feeding, pet walking reminders, adding water and other activities.
  • the elderly scene is used for users to set some activities related to caring for the elderly, such as eating Medication reminder, nutritious meal, exercise, lunch break and other activities.
  • the scan option 413C is used to trigger code scanning.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the device attribute of the added device according to the user's selection. Afterwards, the added devices are arranged in the device display area 412 according to the device attributes. That is to say, after the electronic device 100 determines the device that needs to be added, multiple device attribute options may be provided for the user to determine the device attribute of the device.
  • the electronic device 100 may automatically determine the device attribute of the device according to the type of the device. For example, when the electronic device 100 determines that the added device is an earphone, the electronic device 100 may automatically classify the device as a portable device.
  • the working device may send indication information including device attributes to the electronic device 100, and the electronic device 100 may determine the device attribute of the device added by the electronic device 100 according to the indication information.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive an operation of modifying the device attribute by the user, and change the device attribute of the device.
  • FIG. 7C exemplarily shows the updated user interface 41 after the electronic device 100 adds a device.
  • housework equipment and entertainment equipment are newly added in the equipment display area 412 , where the household equipment includes a sweeping robot and a smart desk lamp.
  • the device display area 412 may include: a first device option 412A and a second device option 412B.
  • the first equipment option 412A corresponds to the cleaning robot in the household equipment
  • the second equipment option 412B corresponds to the smart desk lamp in the household equipment.
  • the first device option 412A can be used to trigger setting related configurations of the cleaning robot.
  • the first device option 412A can detect a user's touch operation (such as a long press operation), and in response to this operation, the electronic device 100 adds a setting window 412C as shown in FIG. 7D in the area where the first device option 412A is located. .
  • a user's touch operation such as a long press operation
  • the setting window 412C may include: an edit name option 4121C, a share device option 4122C, and a delete device option 4123C options.
  • the edit name option 4121C can be used to trigger modification of the name of the device.
  • Share device option 4122C may be used to trigger sharing of the device with other users for the other users to have access to configure and control the device.
  • the delete device 4123C can be used to trigger the deletion of the device, and remove the device from the device display area 412 .
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's touch operation on the edit name option 4121C shown in FIG. 7D, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 42 shown in FIG. Change the name of the device.
  • the user interface 42 may include: a return control 421 and an information input window 422 .
  • the return control 421 can be used to exit the user interface 42 and return to the upper level user interface (such as the user interface 41 ).
  • the information input window 422 can be used to input the name of the device, such as "husband's sweeping robot". After the electronic device 100 detects the touch operation acting on the return control 421, the electronic device 100 uses the text entered in the information input window 422 as a modification. The name of the subsequent device is displayed on the relevant device in the device display area 412 of the user interface 41.
  • the electronic device 100 can also detect the user's touch operation on the shared device option 4122C shown in FIG. 7D, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 43 as shown in FIG. 7F or 7H or 7I. , the user interface 43 is used to set the device to be shared with family members.
  • the user interface 43 may include: a return control 431 , a home option 432 , and a confirmation control 433 .
  • the return control 431 can be used to exit the user interface 43 and return to the upper-level user interface (such as the user interface 41 ).
  • Family option 432 may be used to select family members from within the family to share the device.
  • Confirmation control 433 may be used to determine the sharing members of the device according to the user's configuration settings in family options 432 .
  • Family options 432 may include: family name 432A, selection option 432B. The family name 432A is used to display the name of the family.
  • the family name 432A can detect a user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, expand the family members included in the family. Selecting option 432B may be used to select all family members in the household to share the device.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the family name 432A, it expands all family members included in the family, and the family option 432 is updated as the family option 432 in the user interface 43 as shown in FIG. 7G .
  • the family option 432 further includes: a first family member 432C, a second family member 432D, and a third family member 432E.
  • the first family member 432C, the second family member 432D and the third family member 432E respectively correspond to the family members included in the family
  • the first family member 432C includes a switch 4321C
  • the second family member 432D includes a switch 4321D
  • the third family member Member 432E includes switch 4321E.
  • the switch 4321C, the switch 4321D, and the switch 4321E can respectively detect the touch operation of the user, and enable or disable the sharing of the device by their corresponding family members.
  • the user interface 43 may include: a return control 434 , a search window 435 , and a determination control 436 .
  • the return control 434 can be used to exit the user interface 43 and return to the upper level user interface (such as the user interface 41 ).
  • the search window 435 can be used to search for a user according to the mobile phone number and share the device with the user, and the determination control 436 can be used to determine the member who sets the device sharing according to the user searched by the user.
  • the user interface 43 may include: a return control 437 , a select all option 438 , and a member list 439 .
  • the return control 437 can be used to exit the user interface 43 and return to the upper level user interface (such as the user interface 41 ).
  • Select all option 438 can be used to check all members enumerated in member list 439, can enumerate the family members in all families that user joins in member list 439, perhaps, all communication contacts of user etc., user can be listed in member list 439 Select the shared member.
  • the electronic device 100 can also detect the user's touch operation on the delete device 4123C in FIG. 7D , and in response to the operation, display a prompt window 414 as shown in FIG. to prompt the user whether to delete the device.
  • the prompt window 414 may include: a cancel option 414A and a delete option 414B.
  • the cancel option 414A can be used to cancel the deletion of the device
  • the delete option 414B can be used to confirm the deletion of the device.
  • Fig. 7A-Fig. 7J show the user interfaces related to some basic settings of user adding and managing devices. Users can add work devices to manage and control work devices, and share work devices with family members. Management and control of work equipment by other users. In this way, after the electronic device 100 has adjusted the schedule activities, the electronic device 100 can directly control the working status of these working devices, so that the working devices can provide users with targeted services.
  • 8A-8B exemplarily show some user interfaces involved in advanced configuration of the device.
  • the electronic device 100 may also implement some advanced configurations on the devices, and the advanced configurations include setting working parameters of the devices.
  • the electronic device 100 When the electronic device 100 detects a touch operation (such as a click operation) performed by the user on the first device option 412A shown in FIG. 7C, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 8A.
  • the interface 51 is used to display the working parameters of the equipment corresponding to the first equipment option 412A.
  • the user interface 51 may include: a cancel control 511 , a confirmation control 512 , and a parameter setting area 513 .
  • the cancel control 511 can be used to cancel setting the working parameters of the device, and return to the user interface of the upper level (such as the user interface 41 ).
  • the confirmation control 512 can be used to confirm the setting of the working parameters of the device according to the parameters configured in the parameter setting area 513 .
  • the parameter setting area 513 may contain multiple setting options of the device, status parameters of the device, services of the device, etc., for example, power, working switch, working mode, timing options, working range options, etc., which are exemplarily shown in FIG. 8A
  • the working parameters of the sweeping robot are listed, including working switch, remaining power, water tank remaining, working mode, disinfection option, timing option, working range option, equipment service and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 When the electronic device 100 detects a touch operation (such as a click operation) performed by the user on the second device option 412B shown in FIG. 7C , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 52 as shown in FIG. 8B .
  • the interface 52 is used to display the working parameters of the device corresponding to the second device option 412B.
  • the user interface 52 may include: a cancel control 521 , a confirmation control 522 , and a parameter setting area 523 .
  • the cancel control 521 can be used to cancel setting of the working parameters of the device, and return to the upper user interface (such as the user interface 41 ).
  • the confirmation control 522 can be used to confirm the setting of the working parameters of the device according to the parameters configured in the parameter setting area 523 .
  • the parameter setting area 523 may include multiple setting options of the device, status parameters of the device, services of the device, and so on.
  • Fig. 8B exemplarily shows the working parameters of the smart desk lamp, including working switch, working mode, color temperature option, brightness option, timing option, appointment option, Pomodoro option and so on.
  • FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B refer to user interfaces related to the advanced configuration of different working devices, and do not constitute restrictions on the working parameters set by the advanced configuration of the working devices.
  • Figs. 8A-8B show the process of setting the working parameters of the working device through the distributed schedule application on the electronic device 100, so that the user can centrally control multiple smart home appliances through mobile phones, tablets and other devices, It provides convenience for users to manage and configure smart home appliances in the home.
  • 9A-9E exemplarily show some user interfaces involved in adding a calendar activity.
  • FIG. 9A exemplarily shows a user interface 61 displayed when the user operation of adding a schedule activity is detected after the electronic device 100 displays a page corresponding to the schedule option 211B.
  • the user interface 61 is used to add a schedule activity.
  • the user interface 61 may include: a cancel control 611 , a confirmation control 612 , a schedule name 613 , an event attribute 614 , notify members 615 , related equipment 616 , work hours 617 , and repeat dates 618 .
  • the cancel control 611 is used for canceling adding the scheduled activity.
  • the confirmation control 612 is used to confirm adding the schedule activity.
  • the schedule name 613 is used to input the name of the schedule activity.
  • the activity attribute 614 is used to select the activity attribute to which the scheduled activity belongs.
  • the notification member 615 is used to select the user who needs to be notified of the scheduled activity, and the member notified of the activity is the execution object of the scheduled activity.
  • the related equipment 616 is used to set the working equipment related to the schedule activity, so that when the electronic device 100 executes the schedule activity, it can control the working status of its related working equipment, so as to complete the schedule activity.
  • Working time 617 is used to set the duration of the activity, which may include start time and end time.
  • Repeat date 618 is used to set the repeat date of the schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the activity attribute 614, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays a user interface 62 as shown in FIG. 9B, and the user interface 62 is used to set the activity to which the scheduled activity belongs Attributes.
  • the user interface 62 may include: a return control 621 , an option window 622 , and a priority window 623 .
  • the return control 621 can be used to exit the user interface 62 and return to the upper level user interface (such as the user interface 61 ).
  • Options window 622 may include activity properties options bar 622A and customization options 622B.
  • the activity attribute option column 622A contains one or more preset activity attributes, such as: sleep, study, work, entertainment, cleaning, etc., and the electronic device 100 can detect that the user acts on the one or more activity attributes. control operation, set the activity properties of the activity.
  • the custom option 622B is used for the user to add a custom activity attribute.
  • the custom option 622B includes more options 6221B.
  • the more options 6221B can detect the user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, add a custom activity attribute. Users can add activity attributes by themselves.
  • the priority window 623 is used to set the priority of the activity attribute, and the priority is used to indicate the order in which the scheduled activities are executed.
  • the electronic device 100 may preset priorities.
  • FIG. 9B exemplarily shows that the preset priorities of the electronic device 100 may be: sleep, study, work, entertainment, and cleaning priorities from high to low. Then, when there are two calendar activities at the same time, the electronic device 100 may preferentially satisfy the activity content of the calendar activity with higher priority according to the priorities of the two calendar activities.
  • the priority window 623 may include more options 623A, and the more options 623A may detect a user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, provide the user with an input window for customizing activity priorities. That is to say, the user can change the priority of the activity by himself, or add a self-defined activity attribute to the sorting of the priority of the activity.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the notification member 615 in FIG. 9A, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display a user interface 63 as shown in FIG. Set the users who need to be notified about this schedule event.
  • the user interface 63 may include: a return control 631 and a home option 632 .
  • the return control 631 is used for exiting the user interface 63 and returning to a user interface of a higher level (such as the user interface 61 ).
  • the family option 632 is used to display the family that can be notified of the schedule event.
  • the family option 632 can display the name of the family that the user joins.
  • the family option 632 may include: family name 632A, selection option 632B.
  • the family name 632A is used to display the name of the family.
  • the family name 632A can detect a user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, expand the family members included in the family.
  • Selection option 632B may be used to select all family members in the family to be notified about the calendar event.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the family name 632A, all family members contained in the family are expanded, and the family option 632 is updated as the family option 632 in the user interface 63 as shown in FIG. 9D .
  • the family option 632 further includes: a first family member 632C, a second family member 632D, a third family member 632E, and a confirmation control 633 .
  • the first family member 632C, the second family member 632D and the third family member 632E respectively correspond to the family members included in the family
  • the first family member 632C includes a switch 6321C
  • the second family member 632D includes a switch 6321D
  • the third family member Member 632E includes switch 6321E.
  • the switch 6321C, the switch 6321D, and the switch 6321E can respectively detect the user's touch operation, and select or unselect the corresponding family member.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the confirmation control 633 , the electronic device 100 takes the selected family member as the object to be notified in the schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the user confirmation to add the schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 can display prompt information to remind the user that the currently set schedule activity is different from the previously set schedule activity user, and further, the electronic device 100 can change the content of the schedule activity according to the user's operation, which can automatically be based on the priority of the activity. Level adjustment schedule activities.
  • the electronic device 100 can display the user's interface64.
  • the user interface 64 includes a creation control 641, which can be used to trigger the creation of a family.
  • the electronic device 100 detects a user's touch operation on the creation control 641 , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 31 shown in FIG. 6A .
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 detects a user's touch operation on the relevant device 616 in FIG. 9A, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays a user interface 65 as shown in FIG. Work equipment associated with this schedule activity.
  • the user interface 65 may include: a return control 651 , a confirmation control 652 , and a device display area 653 .
  • the return control 651 can be used to exit the user interface 65 and return to the upper user interface (such as the user interface 61 ).
  • the confirmation control 652 can be used to confirm the work equipment related to setting the schedule activity.
  • the device display area 653 can be used to display devices with which the electronic device 100 has established communication connections, and these devices can be arranged according to device attributes of the devices. Wherein, the device display area 653 may include a first device option 653A and a second device option 653B.
  • the first device option 653A and the second device option 653B may respectively correspond to the cleaning robot and the smart desk lamp with which the electronic device 100 has established a communication connection.
  • the first device option 653A may include a switch 6531A and the second device option 653B may include a switch 6531B.
  • the switch 6531A and the switch 6531B can respectively detect the user's touch operation, and select or unselect the corresponding device.
  • the electronic device 100 regards the selected device as the device related to the schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the repeat date 618 in FIG. 9A, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays a user interface 66 as shown in FIG. The recurrence date for the calendar event.
  • the user interface 66 may include: a return control 661 and a date selection area 662 .
  • the return control 661 is used to exit the user interface 66
  • the date selection area 662 includes a plurality of date options, and these multiple date options can receive the user's operation, and in response to the operation, the date of the selected response is used as the repeated launch of the schedule activity. date.
  • FIG. 9G exemplarily shows that every Sunday and every Monday are selected, and the schedule activity will be repeated on every Sunday and every Monday. In this way, for a scheduled activity that needs to be repeated every week, the user does not need to repeatedly set the scheduled activity, but only needs to set the repeated date of the scheduled activity when adding the scheduled activity for the first time, which is convenient for the user to operate.
  • the electronic device 100 can complete Addition of this calendar event. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 can determine whether there is a conflict between the scheduled event and the previously added scheduled event, and when there is a conflict, the electronic device 100 can display a prompt message to prompt the user to change, or the electronic device 100 can change the conflicting scheduled event by itself , for example, change the execution time of the scheduled activity, or adjust the configuration information of related devices involved in the scheduled activity, etc.
  • the electronic device 100 can display all scheduled activities added by the user, or display all scheduled activities without conflicts after adjustment .
  • display of schedule activities please refer to the content in FIG. 10A-10B below.
  • definition of conflicts and the adjustment of conflicts please refer to the subsequent method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 9A-FIG. 9G show related user interfaces for adding a calendar activity through a distributed calendar application on the electronic device 100 . That is to say, the accuracy of the electronic device 100 in judging the user's life status can be improved through the user's active addition of schedule activities, and a conflict resolution method can be provided for conflicting schedule activities by setting activity priorities, so that the priorities High-scheduled activities can be executed first to enhance the user experience.
  • 10A-10B exemplarily show some user interfaces involved in viewing and managing calendar activities.
  • the electronic device 100 When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the schedule option 211B shown in FIG. 7C , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the page corresponding to the schedule option 211B, that is, the user interface 71 shown in FIG. 10A , the user Interface 71 is used to add, view and manage calendar activities.
  • the user interface 71 may include: a life scene control 711 , a viewing control 712 , an adding control 713 , and an activity list 714 .
  • the life scene control 711 is used to switch schedule activities in different life scenes. Users can add multiple life scenes according to their needs, and set related schedule activities in different life scenes. For example, life scenes can include home care scenes and pet scenes. , Old man scene. For specific descriptions of life scenarios, refer to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here.
  • the view control 712 can be used to find a schedule activity
  • the add control 713 can be used to add a schedule activity in the currently selected life scene.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 9A, and the user interface 61 is used for adding a schedule activity.
  • the activity list 714 is used to enumerate the schedule activities added by the user.
  • the user may refer to the user whose family account is created on the electronic device 100 , or may refer to other family members in the same family. Or, further, the activity list 714 may also list the scheduled activities actively added by the electronic device 100.
  • the electronic device 100 may use AI recognition technology, obtain information collected by the electronic device 100 or establish a communication connection with the electronic device 100. Information collected by other devices and schedule activities obtained.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 acquires that the user has booked an online course at 9:00-10:00 through a learning application, the electronic device 100 can automatically add a schedule event to the activity list 714, and the electronic device 100 can collect The received information determines that the activity time of the schedule activity is 9:00-10:00, and the activity attribute is learning and so on.
  • the activity list 714 may include options corresponding to five schedule activities: the first activity option 714A, the second activity option 714B, the third activity option 714C, the fourth activity option 714D and the fifth activity option 714E. And these five options correspond to five schedule activities respectively, and these five options display the state of the activity, the duration, the name of the activity, the adder of the activity, related equipment and so on.
  • the status icon 7141B included in the second activity option 714B and the status icon 7141C included in the third activity option 714C are used to indicate the status of the activity execution.
  • the icon 7141B is used to indicate that the scheduled activity is executed normally
  • the status icon 7141C is used to indicate that the scheduled activity is abnormal and cannot be executed normally.
  • the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the third activity option 714C, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays a prompt message 715 as shown in FIG. 10B on the user interface 71.
  • the prompt message 715 is used to Indicates to the user the specific reason for the unusual status of this calendar event.
  • the prompt information 715 is used to prompt the user that the reason for the abnormality of the scheduled activity is that the execution object is not within the specified range, for example, the child doing homework is not in the study.
  • the electronic device 100 may display prompt information to prompt the user to maintain the normal execution of the schedule activities, thereby helping the user to better understand the family situation.
  • FIGS. 10A-10B show related user interfaces for viewing and managing calendar activities through the distributed calendar application on the electronic device 100 .
  • the distributed schedule application can automatically optimize conflicting schedule activities to provide users with the best life services. Users can quickly and easily understand the execution of various activities arranged in the family through mobile phones, tablets and other terminal devices, which is convenient. The user's operation improves the user's experience.
  • Fig. 11 shows a schematic flowchart of the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method includes:
  • the electronic device 100 obtains a schedule activity, where the schedule activity includes: activity attribute and activity priority.
  • a schedule activity may refer to a schedule activity arranged by a user.
  • the ways for the electronic device 100 to obtain the schedule activities may include but not limited to the following:
  • the electronic device 100 receives the schedule activity input by the user
  • the electronic device 100 may receive the schedule activity input by the user on the electronic device 100 through the interface for the user to input the schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive a schedule activity input by a user through a distributed schedule application.
  • the electronic device 100 may display a user interface (such as the user interface 61 ) displayed by the distributed calendar application for adding a schedule activity, and obtain the schedule activity input by the user through the user interface.
  • the electronic device 100 can also automatically generate schedule activities according to the collected information. Specifically, the electronic device 100 may generate a schedule event in one or more of the following ways:
  • the electronic device 100 acquires application information to determine a schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the schedule activity from information generated by one or more applications through an interface provided by the applications. For example, the electronic device 100 may obtain an online course reserved by a user at a certain time through a learning application, so as to generate a schedule activity of online course learning at that time.
  • the electronic device 100 acquires information collected by other devices to determine the schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 may link to other devices to obtain information collected by other devices to determine the schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 may obtain a cooking appointment set by the user in the rice cooker, so as to generate a schedule activity related to cooking and eating.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the schedule activities sent by other devices
  • other devices can also obtain the calendar event according to the manner in which the electronic device 100 obtains the calendar event, and then send the calendar event to the electronic device 100 .
  • the manner in which other devices obtain calendar activities please refer to related content of obtaining calendar activities by the electronic device 100 .
  • the user logged in on other devices and the user logged in on the electronic device 100 may be in the same family group. In this way, the electronic device 100 and other devices can share the schedule activities of all members in the family.
  • FIGS. 6A-6H and related descriptions which will not be repeated here.
  • the electronic device 100 may also include other ways of acquiring schedule activities, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the activity attributes are used to classify the schedule activities, indicating the type of the schedule activities, for example, the activity attributes may include: sleep, study, work, entertainment, cleaning and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the activity attribute of the scheduled activity in the following ways:
  • the electronic device 100 receives the schedule activity input by the user
  • the electronic device 100 may provide multiple activity attribute options in the schedule activity, one activity attribute option corresponds to one activity attribute, the electronic device 100 may receive a user operation performed by the user on one of the activity attribute options, and in response to the operation, The activity attribute corresponding to the activity attribute option is determined as the activity attribute of the scheduled activity.
  • the user interface 61 in FIG. 9A is a user interface used by the electronic device 100 to add a schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 can detect the user's touch operation on the activity attribute 614, and respond to the operation, as shown in FIG. 9B
  • the user interface 62 is shown, and the user interface 62 is used to set the activity attribute of the schedule activity.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the user's touch operation on the option window 622 to select or input the activity attribute of the scheduled activity.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the activity attribute of the schedule activity through one or more of the following factors.
  • the electronic device 100 can extract the keywords in the activity name and analyze the most relevant activity attribute through the keyword, for example, when the activity name is "clean the living room" , the electronic device 100 may determine that the activity attribute of the schedule activity is cleaning.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the activity attribute of the schedule event according to the device type of the related device. For example, when the schedule event requires the use of television, the electronic device 100 may determine that the activity attribute of the schedule event is entertainment.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the activity attribute of the scheduled activity according to the previously determined activity attribute of the scheduled activity.
  • the method for determining the activity attribute is not limited to the above-mentioned method, and this embodiment of the present application makes no limitation thereto.
  • the activity priority is used to sort the execution order of each schedule activity, for example, the schedule activity with high priority is executed first, and the schedule activity with low priority is delayed or not executed.
  • the electronic device 100 can preset the priority relationship between the various activity attributes, and after the electronic device 100 determines the activity attributes of the schedule activities, it can determine the execution sequence of the conflicting schedule activities, or the electronic device 100 may also determine the execution sequence of conflicting schedule activities based on the priority relationship between the various activity attributes determined by the user.
  • the priority window 623 in FIG. 9B shows the priority size relationship between the various activity attributes preset by the electronic device 100, and the more option 623A in the priority window 623 can detect the user's touch In response to the operation, the electronic device 100 provides the user with an input window for customizing activity priorities.
  • the electronic device 100 obtains configuration information of related devices of the schedule event.
  • the related equipment of the schedule activity may be the work equipment in the family and participating in the schedule activity.
  • the configuration information is used to control the work of the related device, for example, the configuration information may include the working status, working mode, working range and other information of the related device.
  • FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B exemplarily show a user interface for configuring configuration information of a cleaning robot and a smart desk lamp.
  • step S102 when no related device is involved in the schedule activity, the electronic device 100 may not execute step S102.
  • the electronic device 100 determines whether there is a conflicting schedule event.
  • Ways for the electronic device 100 to determine conflicting schedule activities may include but not limited to the following:
  • Time conflicts among multiple schedule activities may refer to multiple schedule activities in the same time period, that is, multiple schedule activities have overlapping activity times.
  • the electronic device 100 judges how many A schedule event conflicts. For example, if there is a 9:00-10:00 schedule activity, which needs to be cleaned only by the sweeping robot, and there is also a 9:30-10:30 schedule activity, which needs to turn off the sweeping robot, then you can It can be seen that from 9:30 to 10:00, the sweeping robot has two different working states, so the two schedule activities conflict.
  • the device attributes are used to classify the electronic devices involved in the family and indicate the types of the electronic devices.
  • the device attributes may include: portable devices, household devices, entertainment devices, learning devices, and so on.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the device attribute of the working device when establishing a communication connection with the working device.
  • the electronic device 100 may determine the device attribute of the working device in the following two ways:
  • the electronic device 100 determines the device attribute of the working device according to the user's selection
  • the electronic device 100 may provide a plurality of device attribute options for the user to determine the device attribute of the working device.
  • the electronic device 100 automatically determines the device attributes of the working device according to the device information
  • the information may refer to the device type of the working device, and the indication information including device attributes sent by the working device to the electronic device 100 .
  • the method for determining the device attribute is not limited to the above-mentioned method, and this embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation thereto.
  • the electronic device 100 determines that there is a conflict among the multiple scheduled activities. For example, there is a 10:00-10:30 schedule activity, which needs to use the learning machine whose device attribute is learning equipment, and there is also a 10:00-10:30 schedule activity, which needs to use the For a TV whose device attribute is an entertainment device, it can be seen that the two schedule activities in 10:00-10:30 need to use two working devices with different device attributes, and the electronic device 100 can determine that the two schedule activities conflict .
  • step S104 is performed.
  • the electronic device 100 determines whether there is interference between conflicting schedule activities.
  • the electronic device 100 may further determine whether there is interference between these conflicting schedule activities after determining the conflicting schedule activities. For example, although there are schedule activities for children to study and parents to watch TV at the same time, the volume of the sound played on the TV may not be enough to affect the children's study, so these two conflicting schedule activities can be executed simultaneously.
  • the electronic device 100 can perform volume detection through portable devices such as mobile phones, wristbands, watches, earphones, smart glasses, etc. Detect whether the sound from work equipment will affect the development of another scheduled activity. Specifically, when the electronic device 100 detects that the volume produced by working equipment or preset exceeds a threshold (for example, 40 decibels) in a scheduled activity, the electronic device 100 determines that the scheduled activity will interfere with other conflicting scheduled activities.
  • a threshold for example, 40 decibels
  • Range interference refers to the overlap in the range of activities of two concurrently executing scheduled activities. For example, if there is a scheduled activity for the cleaning robot, its activity range includes the dining room and the living room, and there is another scheduled activity for the user to exercise in the living room, the cleaning robot will interfere with the user's fitness activities in the living room.
  • Logical interference refers to the situation where two schedule activities are executed at the same time and there will be interference based on people's common knowledge. For example, there is logical interference between opening the windows for ventilation and turning on the air conditioner for cooling, and there is logical interference when the user automatically waters the green plants while drying clothes on the balcony.
  • step S104 is an optional step, and the electronic device 100 may execute step S105 after determining that there is a conflicting schedule activity.
  • step S105 is executed.
  • the electronic device 100 controls the work of the related device according to the priority of the activity and the configuration information of the related device.
  • FIG. 12 shows a detailed flowchart of step S105.
  • step S105 may specifically include:
  • the electronic device 100 adjusts the conflicting schedule activities according to the priorities of the activities.
  • the electronic device 100 adjusting the conflicting schedule activities means not changing the schedule activities with high priority, but changing the schedule activities with low priority, so that the electronic device 100 can give priority to ensuring the smooth progress of the schedule activities with high priority, and the schedule activities with low priority
  • the scheduled activities can not be executed, postponed, or the execution content can be changed.
  • changing the schedule activity with low priority means that the electronic device 100 can postpone the activity time of the schedule activity with low priority, adjust the configuration information of related devices of the schedule activity with low priority, or delete the schedule activity with low priority.
  • schedule activities For example, there are two schedule activities, one is the schedule activity of the sweeping robot cleaning the living room and bedroom from 9:00 to 10:00, and the other is the schedule activity of the user working in the bedroom from 9:00 to 10:00, the electronic device 100 can Delay the cleaning schedule of the sweeping robot to 10:00-11:00, or adjust the cleaning range of the sweeping robot to only clean the living room.
  • the electronic device 100 determines whether the device related to the adjusted schedule activity is online.
  • Whether the related device is online refers to whether the related device establishes a communication connection with the electronic device 100, or whether the related device is powered on.
  • step S1054 When the related device is online, the electronic device 100 executes step S1054, otherwise, executes step S1053.
  • the electronic device 100 can directly send the configuration information of the related device in the adjusted schedule activity to the related device, so that the related device can work according to the adjusted configuration information. If the related device is not online, the electronic device 100 cannot directly send the adjusted configuration information to the related device, or the related device cannot receive the adjusted configuration information. , to request to obtain the configuration information, so that the electronic device 100 can send the adjusted configuration information to the related device after learning that the related device is online.
  • the electronic device 100 receives the indication information that the relevant device requests to obtain configuration information after it goes online.
  • the electronic device 100 sends the configuration information of the related device to the related device, so that the related device can work according to the configuration information.
  • the configuration information received by the relevant device may be changed configuration information or unchanged configuration information.
  • the configuration information received by the relevant device is unchanged configuration information, it means that there is no conflict or interference in the schedule activity corresponding to the unchanged configuration information, or no conflict or interference has been found for the time being.
  • the changed configuration information is the configuration information of the schedule activity corresponding to the configuration information received by the relevant device for the first time
  • the changed configuration information is the configuration information of the schedule activity corresponding to the configuration information received by the relevant device again
  • the relevant device can execute the schedule activity according to the configuration information recently received, Make relevant equipment work according to the adjusted configuration information, avoiding the conflict of schedule activities.
  • FIG. 10A shows a user interface 71 where the electronic device 100 displays schedule activities, and the user can view and manage one or more schedule activities through the activity list 714, wherein a status icon 7141B and a status icon 7141C can be used to indicate schedule activities execution status.
  • the electronic device 100 is a control device, and the control device is used to receive the schedule activities input by the user, determine conflicting scenarios according to the schedule activities, adjust the execution order of the schedule activities, establish a communication connection with the work equipment, and send Send configuration information to control the work of the working equipment. Since multiple control devices can be included in the smart home scene, one control device can provide services for a family member in the family, and the electronic device 100 can be a device used by one of the users in the family. After the electronic device 100 obtains the schedule activities , the schedule event can also be sent to other control devices in the family, so that all members of the family can view the same schedule event.
  • the electronic device 100 when the electronic device 100 controls the work of the working device, the electronic device 100 may refer to the electronic device with the best performance, the least load, or the creation of a family, or the electronic device that obtains the schedule activity for the first time,
  • the schedule activity is the schedule activity for controlling the work of the work equipment. That is to say, the control device that sends configuration information to the working device can be the device with the best performance, the least load, or a family among all the control devices, or the publisher in the schedule activity, etc. No limit.
  • the electronic device 100 may also receive a user's operation to change the configuration information of the related device of the schedule event, thereby changing the working device of the related device. In this way, the electronic device 100 can not only adjust the contents of the schedule activities by itself, but also can adjust the contents of the schedule activities by receiving the user's operation, which enhances the user's operability and improves the freedom of adjusting the schedule activities.
  • the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application can combine user input, AI recognition technology, other equipment and other means to obtain schedule activities, so as to achieve more accurate and complete acquisition of schedule activities, and in this technology, by setting The activity priority solves the conflicting schedule activities, and controls the devices in the family according to the schedule activities, avoids the interference between the schedule activities, helps users manage the family in an orderly manner, and improves the user's sense of home experience.
  • Fig. 13 shows a schematic flowchart of the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the method includes:
  • the first device obtains a first activity, where the first activity includes first configuration information of a first working device.
  • the first device may refer to any control device in the communication system 1000 shown in FIG. 2 , and may also refer to the electronic device 100 .
  • the first activity may refer to a schedule activity arranged by the user.
  • the first device may obtain the first activity through user input, active generation or other devices.
  • the first device may obtain the first activity through user input, active generation or other devices.
  • the first device may obtain the first activity through user input, active generation or other devices.
  • the first working device may refer to any one or more working devices in the communication system 1000 as shown in FIG. , so that the first working device completes the home service that needs to be provided in the first activity.
  • the first configuration information may include the working state, working parameters and other information of the first working device, and the working parameters may include: volume, temperature, range, distance, working mode or brightness and so on.
  • the first activity can be obtained by the first device through other control devices.
  • the first device may acquire the first activity on the second device. That is to say, one user in the family can set the first activity on the second device, so that another user in the family can obtain the first activity through the first device.
  • the first activity may be an activity generated by the first device according to the acquired information, for example, a schedule activity generated by collecting information of an application program.
  • the first device when the user sets the first activity through the user interface of the first device (such as FIG. 9A), the first device may display the first setting interface (such as FIG. 8A or 8B), and the first device may detect In the first setting on the first setting interface, the user sets configuration information (for example, first configuration information) for the working equipment involved in the first activity (for example, the first working equipment).
  • the first device when the user sets the first activity through the user interface of the first device (such as FIG. 9A), the first device may display the first setting interface (such as FIG. 8A or 8B), and the first device may detect In the first setting on the first setting interface, the user sets configuration information (for example, first configuration information) for the working equipment involved in the first activity (for example, the first working equipment).
  • the first device may also receive an operation by the user to select an activity member of the activity (for example, the notification in FIG. 9A ).
  • Member 615 after completing the setting of the activity, the first device can remind the activity members of the activity, the relevant situation of the activity, for example, inform the activity members of the relevant information of the activity, or remind the user that the activity is about to start and so on.
  • the first device sends the first configuration information to the first working device.
  • the first device may trigger sending the first configuration information to the first working device in the following situations:
  • the first device After the first device acquires the first activity, it triggers sending the first configuration information to the first working device
  • the first device after the first device obtains a schedule activity, it will trigger to send configuration information to the working equipment involved in the schedule activity, so that the working equipment can complete the corresponding work in time according to the schedule activity.
  • the first device After receiving the user operation, the first device sends the first configuration information to the first working device
  • the user operation may refer to an operation in which the user triggers the execution of the first activity. For example, after the device completes a day's schedule activities, the user may trigger the sending of configuration information in all schedule activities to the corresponding working device. In this way, the first device can After receiving the schedule activities of a day, adjust these schedule activities to avoid conflicts of schedule activities, thereby preventing the working equipment from receiving conflicting configuration information.
  • step S202 may be any step performed after S201 and before S208, and the execution order of step S202 in this embodiment of the present application is not limited.
  • the first device obtains a second activity, where the second activity includes second configuration information of the second working device.
  • the second activity also refers to a schedule activity arranged by the user.
  • the second working device may refer to any one or more working devices in the communication system 1000 shown in FIG. 2 , and the second configuration information may be used to control the work of the second working device so that the second working device completes the second activity Home services that need to be provided.
  • the second configuration information may include the working state, working time, working mode, working range and other information of the second working device.
  • the first device may obtain the second activity through user input, active generation, or other means.
  • the second activity may be a schedule activity set by the user on the first device.
  • the first device may display a user interface (for example, the user interface 61 shown in FIG. Set the activity time, notification members, related equipment, repeat time and other content of the schedule activity on the interface.
  • the first device determines whether the first activity conflicts with the second activity.
  • the conflict between the first activity and the second activity may refer to the time conflict between the first activity and the second activity, and the time conflict between the first activity and the second activity means that the activity time of the first activity overlaps with the activity time of the second activity time period.
  • the further conflict between the first activity and the second activity also includes:
  • the first device is the same as the second device, and the first configuration information is different from the second configuration information
  • the first device determines that the first activity conflicts with the second activity.
  • the first equipment judges that the first activity and the second activity conflict, or, when the first activity and the second activity If the activity time conflicts, and the activity attributes of the first activity and the second activity are different, the first device determines that the first activity conflicts with the second activity.
  • the first activity conflicts with the second activity time, and when the same activity member is involved, the first device determines that the first activity conflicts with the second activity.
  • an activity member refers to an execution object of the schedule activity. For example, in a schedule activity of a child doing homework, the child is an active member of the schedule activity.
  • the first device determines whether the first device conflicts with the second device.
  • the relevant content of the aforementioned electronic device 100 determining conflicting schedule activities please refer to the relevant content of the aforementioned electronic device 100 determining conflicting schedule activities, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first device may adjust the activity time of the first activity or the activity time of the second activity, so as to avoid that the first activity and the second activity are in the same time period Execute at the same time.
  • the first device may remind the user when the first activity and the second activity conflict as described in the above-mentioned situations 2 and 3, for example, display a prompt message to remind the user that the first activity and the second activity conflict.
  • the first device may adjust the first configuration information or the second configuration information when the first activity and the second activity conflict as described in the above case 1.
  • step S205 When the first device judges that the first activity conflicts with the second activity, step S205 is performed; otherwise, step S209 is performed.
  • the first device determines whether there is interference between the first activity and the second activity.
  • Interference between the first activity and the second activity may refer to volume interference, range interference, or logic interference between the first activity and the second activity.
  • volume interference refers to the loud volume of the working equipment involved in the first activity or the second activity, which will affect the normal development of another scheduled activity in the first activity or the second activity
  • range interference refers to the first or second activity.
  • the working scope of the work equipment involved in the second activity will affect the normal development of the first activity or another scheduled activity in the second activity.
  • Logical interference means that the first activity and the second activity cannot be considered under the common knowledge of people. Two schedule activities that execute concurrently. For details about the manner in which the first device judges whether the first activity interferes with the second activity, reference may be made to the related contents of several types of interference that may exist between conflicting schedule activities, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first device can use portable devices, such as mobile phones, watches, bracelets, earphones and other devices, to detect the volume of the first device when the first activity is carried out. When the volume is greater than the threshold, then The first device determines that when the first activity is performed, the first activity interferes with the second activity when the second activity is performed.
  • portable devices such as mobile phones, watches, bracelets, earphones and other devices
  • step S206 When the first device determines that there is interference between the first activity and the second activity, step S206 is performed; otherwise, step S209 is performed.
  • the first device determines whether the priority of the first activity is lower than the priority of the second activity.
  • the first device may adjust the first activity and the second activity when there is a conflict between the first activity and the second activity, or when there is further interference, to give priority to ensuring the normal progress of the scheduled activity with a high priority, and to ensure the normal progress of the scheduled activity with a low priority. Do not execute or change the activity content of the low-priority scheduled activity, for example, postpone the activity time of the low-priority scheduled activity, or modify the configuration information of the working equipment involved in the low-priority scheduled activity.
  • step S208 is performed; otherwise, step S207 is performed.
  • the first device adjusts the second configuration information of the second device, obtains the adjusted second configuration information, and sends the adjusted second configuration information of the second activity to the second device.
  • the first device may adjust the activity content of the second activity. Specifically, the first device may change the second configuration information of the second device, so that in the adjusted second activity, the work of the second device will not affect the first activity.
  • the first device adjusts the first configuration information of the first device, obtains the adjusted first configuration information, and sends the adjusted first configuration information of the first activity to the first device.
  • the first device may adjust the activity content of the first activity. Specifically, the first device may change the first configuration information of the first device, so that in the adjusted first activity, the work of the first device will not affect the second activity.
  • the electronic device 100 does not execute step S208.
  • the first device sends the second configuration information of the second activity to the second device.
  • the first device Since the priority of the first activity is lower than that of the second activity, the first device does not adjust the second activity, and the first device can directly send the second configuration information of the second activity to the second device, so that the second device can configure the second activity according to the second activity. Two configuration information to work.
  • step S209 may also be any step performed after step S203 and before step S208, and the final work performed by the working device is to work according to the latest configuration information received.
  • the first activity may further include third configuration information of the third working device, where the third configuration information is used to control the third working device to perform a second operation related to the first activity.
  • the first device may adjust the first activity.
  • the conflict or interference between the first activity and the second activity may mean that the first configuration information or the third configuration information of the first activity affects the second activity, and the first device adjusts the first configuration information or the second configuration information.
  • the volume of the entertainment equipment affects or will affect the children's learning activities
  • the volume of the entertainment equipment can be adjusted to avoid the impact of entertainment activities and learning activities
  • the control device may only change the configuration information of this part of the devices. In this way, it can be ensured to the greatest extent that the working device performs corresponding work according to the schedule activities arranged by the user.
  • the sending of the configuration information to the working device by the first device may specifically be that the first device may send the configuration information to the working device after receiving an acquisition request from the working device to obtain the configuration information. That is to say, after the working device is online, it can broadcast a message to other devices, requesting to obtain the configuration information of the working device, so as to avoid missing the configuration information of the working device when the working device enters the online state from the offline state.
  • the first device may change the low-priority calendar activity actively or according to the user's operation.
  • the first device may prompt the user that currently there are conflicts or interference in multiple schedule activities.
  • the first activity or the second activity may not include the configuration information of the working device.
  • the first activity and the second activity may be only a reminder activity that needs to be notified to the user.
  • the activity of the user going out may be Without involving the configuration information of the working device, the first device may prompt the user to go out when the activity time of the activity is reached.
  • the first device may also be called the first control device
  • the second device may also be called the second control device
  • the first event may also be called the first schedule event.
  • the second activity may also be referred to as a second schedule activity, and so on.
  • the acquisition method of the first event is also applicable to the second event or other scheduled events, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, or a magnetic tape), an optical medium (such as a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (solid state disk, SSD)), etc.
  • the processes can be completed by computer programs to instruct related hardware.
  • the programs can be stored in computer-readable storage media.
  • When the programs are executed may include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: ROM or random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, and other various media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Automation & Control Theory (AREA)
  • Human Resources & Organizations (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Entrepreneurship & Innovation (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Strategic Management (AREA)
  • Operations Research (AREA)
  • Marketing (AREA)
  • Data Mining & Analysis (AREA)
  • Economics (AREA)
  • Tourism & Hospitality (AREA)
  • General Business, Economics & Management (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Management, Administration, Business Operations System, And Electronic Commerce (AREA)

Abstract

An activity management method and a corresponding electronic device, a readable storage medium, and a computer program product. The method relates to a control device and a working device. The control device can acquire a scheduled activity which is input by a user, wherein the scheduled activity comprises configuration information of the working device; and the control device can send the configuration information to the working device, such that the working device works according to the configuration information. A user can control the working of a plurality of electronic devices by means of setting the scheduled activity, such that the user experience is improved. The electronic device comprises a memory, one or more processors, and one or more programs, wherein when the one or more processors execute the one or more programs, the electronic device implements the method. The computer readable storage medium comprises instructions, wherein the instructions, when run on the electronic device, make the electronic device execute the method. The computer program product makes a computer execute the method when the computer program product is run on the computer.

Description

活动管理方法及电子设备Event management method and electronic device

本申请要求于2021年10月21日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111230900.1、申请名称为“活动管理方法及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application with application number 202111230900.1 and application title "Activity Management Method and Electronic Device" filed with the China Patent Office on October 21, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

技术领域technical field

本申请涉及终端及通信技术领域,尤其涉及活动管理方法及电子设备。The present application relates to the field of terminal and communication technologies, and in particular to an activity management method and electronic equipment.

背景技术Background technique

随着技术的发展,日常生活中的智能化设备越来越多,功能也越来越丰富。例如一些智能家居设备,如智能电视、空调、台灯、电脑、空气净化器、智能音箱、扫地机器人等,可以为用户提供丰富的家居生活体验。With the development of technology, there are more and more intelligent devices in daily life, and their functions are becoming more and more abundant. For example, some smart home devices, such as smart TVs, air conditioners, desk lamps, computers, air purifiers, smart speakers, sweeping robots, etc., can provide users with a rich home life experience.

当前用户可以单独一个个对需要工作的电子设备进行控制,但用户操作相对繁杂。如何更便捷地对智能设备进行控制,提供更符合用户需求的服务,是目前亟待解决的问题。Currently, users can control electronic devices that need to work one by one, but user operations are relatively complicated. How to control smart devices more conveniently and provide services that better meet user needs is an urgent problem to be solved.

发明内容Contents of the invention

本申请提供了活动管理方法及电子设备,实现了通过设置日程活动来关联一个或多个智能设备,为用户提供智慧生活体验。The application provides an activity management method and an electronic device, which realizes associating one or more smart devices by setting a schedule event, and provides users with a smart life experience.

第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种活动管理方法,该方法包括:第一控制设备获取第一日程活动,第一日程活动包括第一工作设备的第一配置信息,第一配置信息用于控制第一工作设备执行第一日程活动相关的第一操作;第一控制设备将第一配置信息发送给第一工作设备执行。In the first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides an activity management method, the method includes: the first control device obtains the first schedule activity, the first schedule activity includes the first configuration information of the first working equipment, and the first configuration information uses To control the first working device to perform a first operation related to the first schedule activity; the first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device for execution.

其中,控制设备用于获取用户设置的日程活动,并将日程活动相关的配置信息发送给工作设备。工作设备用于接收配置信息,并根据配置信息为用户提供相应的家庭服务。可以看出,用户可以通过发布日程活动,控制家庭中的电子设备的工作,便捷用户的操作,为用户提供全场景化的数字生活体验,提升用户的体验感。Wherein, the control device is used to obtain the schedule activity set by the user, and send configuration information related to the schedule activity to the working device. The working device is used to receive the configuration information, and provide the corresponding home service for the user according to the configuration information. It can be seen that users can control the work of electronic devices in the home by posting schedule activities, facilitate user operations, provide users with a full-scenario digital life experience, and enhance user experience.

可以理解的是,日程活动可以是指家庭、工作、医疗、物流、农业、交通、安防、建筑、能源、制造、零售、自动驾驶、多设备管理、专家系统、自动决策系统等等应用场景下的,用户在某一时间节点或时间段的计划与安排,而控制设备与工作设备则是相应应用场景下涉及到的电子设备。例如,在家庭应用场景下,日程活动可以为与家庭成员的日常生活有关的活动,控制设备可以为家庭成员携带的终端设备,例如手机,工作设备可以为智能家居,例如,电视、电脑、台灯、空气净化器、智能音箱、扫地机器人、冰箱等等。It is understandable that schedule activities can refer to family, work, medical care, logistics, agriculture, transportation, security, construction, energy, manufacturing, retail, automatic driving, multi-device management, expert systems, automatic decision-making systems and other application scenarios The plan and arrangement of the user at a certain time node or time period, while the control equipment and working equipment are the electronic equipment involved in the corresponding application scenarios. For example, in a home application scenario, the schedule activities can be activities related to the daily life of family members, the control device can be a terminal device carried by family members, such as a mobile phone, and the work device can be a smart home, such as a TV, computer, desk lamp , air purifiers, smart speakers, robot vacuums, refrigerators, etc.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,方法还包括:第一控制设备获取第二日程活动,第二日程活动为第一用户在第一控制设备上设置的日程活动,或,第二日程活动为第一控制设备从第二控制设备获取的日程活动,或,第二日程活动为第一控制设备通过采集应用程序的信息生成的日程活动。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the method further includes: the first control device acquires a second schedule event, the second schedule event is a schedule event set by the first user on the first control device, or, the second schedule event It is a schedule activity acquired by the first control device from the second control device, or, the second schedule activity is a schedule activity generated by the first control device by collecting information of an application program.

也就是说,用户可以在控制设备上发布多个日程活动,控制多个不同设备的工作,帮助用户更好地管控和安排日程活动,并控制家庭中的各电子设备辅助或主导完成日程活动响应的工作,帮助用户更好地管理家庭,或者,该日程活动还可以是控制设备从其他控制设备上 获取的日程活动,这样,一个家庭中多个家庭成员可以通过不同的控制设备发布日程活动,控制设备可以集中获取和显示出所有家庭成员发布的日程活动,便捷用户的操作。另外,除了用户可以主动在控制设备上发布日程活动外,控制设备还可以自动根据应用上的信息生成日程活动,例如,当控制设备通过学习类应用获取到用户预约有一个网络课程,控制设备可以自动根据该网络课程的信息生成一个日程活动。That is to say, users can publish multiple schedule activities on the control device, control the work of multiple different devices, help users better manage and arrange schedule activities, and control each electronic device in the home to assist or lead the completion of schedule activity responses to help users manage their families better, or the schedule activity can also be a schedule activity obtained by the control device from other control devices, so that multiple family members in a family can publish schedule activities through different control devices, The control device can centrally obtain and display the schedule activities released by all family members, which is convenient for users to operate. In addition, in addition to users actively publishing schedule activities on the control device, the control device can also automatically generate schedule activities based on the information on the application. Automatically generate a schedule event based on the information of this online course.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,方法还包括:在第一日程活动与第二日程活动冲突的情况下,第一控制设备提醒第一用户,或,调整第一日程活动或第二日程活动。With reference to the first aspect, in some embodiments, the method further includes: when the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity, the first control device reminds the first user, or, adjusts the first schedule activity or the second schedule activity Activity.

也就是说,当用户设置的家庭活动出现冲突时,控制设备可以显示提示信息,提示用户设置的日程活动出现了冲突,用户可以进一步根据提示信息调整冲突的日程活动,或者,控制设备可以自动调整冲突的日程活动。That is to say, when there is a conflict between the family activities set by the user, the control device can display a prompt message to remind the user that there is a conflict between the schedule activities set by the user, and the user can further adjust the conflicting schedule activities according to the prompt information, or the control device can automatically adjust Conflicting schedule activities.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,第一日程活动对应第一时间,第二日程活动对应第二时间;在第一日程活动与第二日程活动冲突的情况下,第一控制设备提醒第一用户,具体包括:在第一时间与第二时间有重叠,且第一日程活动关联的用户对象与第二日程活动关联的用户对象有重叠的情况下,第一控制设备显示提示信息;或在第一时间与第二时间有重叠,且第一日程活动的属性与第二日程活动的属性有冲突的情况下,第一控制设备显示提示信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations, the first scheduled event corresponds to the first time, and the second scheduled event corresponds to the second time; when the first scheduled event conflicts with the second scheduled event, the first control device reminds the first scheduled event A user, specifically including: when the first time overlaps with the second time, and the user object associated with the first schedule activity overlaps with the user object associated with the second schedule activity, the first control device displays prompt information; or In the case that the first time overlaps with the second time, and the attribute of the first schedule activity conflicts with the attribute of the second schedule activity, the first control device displays prompt information.

也就是说,在日程活动存在以下冲突时,控制设备可以显示提示信息,提示日程活动存在冲突:不同的日程活动的活动时间重叠且涉及到相同的活动对象(即用户对象),或者,不同的日程活动的活动时间重叠且活动属性冲突。其中活动对象是指与活动有关的用户,或执行该活动的用户,活动属性是指活动所属的类别,例如,活动属性可以包括:睡眠、学习、工作、娱乐、清洁等等,例如,两个日程活动冲突可以是指一个日程活动属于学习类的活动,一个日程活动属于娱乐类的活动。That is to say, when the following conflicts exist in the scheduled activities, the control device can display a prompt message, indicating that there is a conflict in the scheduled activities: the activity time of different scheduled activities overlaps and involves the same active object (that is, the user object), or, different Scheduled activities have overlapping activity times and conflicting activity attributes. The activity object refers to the user related to the activity, or the user who executes the activity, and the activity attribute refers to the category to which the activity belongs. For example, the activity attribute can include: sleep, study, work, entertainment, cleaning, etc., for example, two A schedule activity conflict may refer to that one schedule activity belongs to a learning activity, and the other schedule activity belongs to an entertainment activity.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,第二日程活动包括第二工作设备的第二配置信息;在第一日程活动与第二日程活动冲突的情况下,第一控制设备显示提示信息,或,第一控制设备调整第一日程活动或第二日程活动,具体包括:在第一时间与第二时间有重叠,且,第一工作设备与第二工作设备为同一个设备,且,第一配置信息与第二配置信息不同的情况下,第一控制设备显示提示信息,或,第一控制设备调整第一配置信息或第二配置信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations, the second schedule activity includes second configuration information of the second working device; if the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity, the first control device displays prompt information, or , the first control device adjusts the first schedule activity or the second schedule activity, specifically including: there is overlap between the first time and the second time, and the first working equipment and the second working equipment are the same equipment, and the first If the configuration information is different from the second configuration information, the first control device displays prompt information, or the first control device adjusts the first configuration information or the second configuration information.

也就是说,两个日程活动冲突还可以是指这两个日程活动的活动时间有重叠,且涉及到同一个工作设备的不同配置信息,这时,控制设备可以显示提示信息或调整其中一个日程活动涉及的配置信息,从而避免工作设备出现工作冲突的情况,帮助工作设备更好地完成用户安排的日程活动。结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,第一日程活动还包括第三工作设备的第三配置信息,第三配置信息用于控制第三工作设备执行第一日程活动相关的第二操作。In other words, the conflict between the two schedule activities can also mean that the activity time of the two schedule activities overlaps and involves different configuration information of the same working device. At this time, the control device can display prompt information or adjust one of the schedules The configuration information involved in the activity, so as to avoid work conflicts in the work equipment, and help the work equipment to better complete the schedule activities arranged by the user. With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations, the first schedule activity further includes third configuration information of the third working device, and the third configuration information is used to control the third working device to perform a second operation related to the first schedule activity.

也就是说,一个日程活动中可以包含对多个设备的配置信息,用户可以通过设置一个日程活动来达到控制多个设备的目的。That is to say, a schedule activity may contain configuration information for multiple devices, and a user may control multiple devices by setting a schedule activity.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,第一日程活动还包括第三工作设备的第三配置信息,在第一日程活动与第二日程活动冲突的情况下,第一控制设备调整第一日程活动或第二日程活动,具体包括:在第一时间与第二时间有重叠,且第一配置信息对第二日程活动有影响的情况下,第一控制设备调整第一配置信息;或在第一时间与第二时间有重叠,且第三配置信息对第二日程活动有影响的情况下,第一控制设备调整第二配置信息。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations, the first schedule activity further includes third configuration information of the third working device, and in the case that the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity, the first control device adjusts the first schedule activities or second scheduled activities, specifically including: when the first time overlaps with the second time and the first configuration information affects the second scheduled activity, the first control device adjusts the first configuration information; or When the first time overlaps with the second time and the third configuration information affects the second schedule activity, the first control device adjusts the second configuration information.

一个日程活动工作设备的配置信息影响另一个日程活动,可以是指工作设备按照该配置信息工作是会与另一个日程活动冲突或对另一个日程活动产生干扰,这里,冲突可以是指时间冲突、涉及到同一个设备的不同配置信息,涉及到用一个活动成员,涉及到不同活动属性 的活动等等,干扰可以是指音量干扰、距离干扰、逻辑干扰等等,例如,一个日程活动中,娱乐设备工作时的音量对另一个日程活动中,家庭成员的学习造成干扰,则前一个日程活动对后一个日程活动有影响。也就是说,当一个日程活动中的部分活动内容与另一个日程活动冲突或干扰时,控制设备可以仅更改该部分活动内容。这样,可以最大限度保证工作设备按照用户安排的日程活动执行相应的工作。The configuration information of a working device for a schedule activity affects another schedule activity, which may refer to whether the working device works according to the configuration information, which will conflict with or interfere with another schedule activity. Here, the conflict may refer to a time conflict, It involves different configuration information of the same device, involves using one activity member, activities involving different activity attributes, etc. Interference can refer to volume interference, distance interference, logical interference, etc. For example, in a schedule event, entertainment If the volume when the equipment is working interferes with the study of family members in another scheduled activity, the previous scheduled activity will have an impact on the latter scheduled activity. That is to say, when part of the activity content in one scheduled activity conflicts or interferes with another scheduled activity, the control device can only change the part of the activity content. In this way, it can be ensured to the greatest extent that the working device performs corresponding work according to the schedule activities arranged by the user.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,第一控制设备将第一配置信息发送给第一工作设备执行,具体包括:第一控制设备在获取到第一日程活动时,将第一配置信息发送给第一工作设备;或在第一工作设备上线后,第一控制设备接收到第一工作设备的获取请求后,将第一配置信息发送给第一工作设备。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations, the first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device for execution, specifically including: when the first control device obtains the first schedule activity, sending the first configuration information to to the first working device; or after the first working device is online, the first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device after receiving the acquisition request from the first working device.

也就是说,控制设备可以在接收到配置信息后便立即将该配置信息下发给相应的工作设备,保证工作设备及时根据用户下发的配置信息工作,或者,在工作设备上线后,根据工作设备发送的请求获取配置信息的获取请求,将配置信息发送给工作设备,避免工作设备在离线后重新上线时,错过用户下发的配置信息,及时保证工作设备的正常工作。That is to say, the control device can send the configuration information to the corresponding working device immediately after receiving the configuration information, so as to ensure that the working device works in time according to the configuration information issued by the user, or, after the working device goes online, The request sent by the device is to obtain the configuration information, and the configuration information is sent to the working device to avoid missing the configuration information sent by the user when the working device is offline and then online again, and to ensure the normal operation of the working device in time.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,第一配置信息包括第一工作设备工作的时间、工作参数,工作参数包括如下一个或多个:音量、温度、范围、距离、工作模式或亮度。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations, the first configuration information includes working time and working parameters of the first working device, and the working parameters include one or more of the following: volume, temperature, range, distance, working mode or brightness.

也就是说,控制设备可以通过设置工作设备的工作时间以及工作参数来完成对工作设备的配置信息的设置,从而控制工作设备按照该工作时间和工作参数工作。That is to say, the control device can set the configuration information of the working device by setting the working time and working parameters of the working device, so as to control the working device to work according to the working time and working parameters.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,第一控制设备获取第一日程活动,具体包括:第一控制设备检测用户在第一设置界面的第一设置,第一设置包括:第一日程活动的第一时间,第一工作设备的第一配置信息;第一控制设备设置第一日程活动,第一日程活动包括第一设置界面的第一设置。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations, the acquisition of the first schedule by the first control device specifically includes: the first control device detects the first setting of the user on the first setting interface, and the first setting includes: the first setting of the schedule At the first time, the first configuration information of the first working device; the first control device sets the first schedule activity, and the first schedule activity includes the first setting on the first setting interface.

可以阐述,控制设备可以显示一个用户界面以供用户完成对工作设备的配置信息的设置。It can be stated that the control device can display a user interface for the user to complete the setting of the configuration information of the working device.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,第一设置还包括选择第一日程活动关联的第二用户,方法还包括:在设置第一日程活动后,第一控制设备提醒第二用户。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations, the first setting further includes selecting a second user associated with the first scheduled event, and the method further includes: after setting the first scheduled event, the first control device reminds the second user.

也就是说,在完成日程活动的设置后,控制设备可以向其他设备发送提示信息,提醒用户与其相关的日程活动已将开展或已开展,该其他设备对应的用户即为与日程活动相关的用户。That is to say, after completing the setting of the schedule activity, the control device can send prompt information to other devices to remind the user that the schedule activity related to it is about to be carried out or has been carried out, and the user corresponding to the other device is the user related to the schedule activity .

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,方法还包括:第一控制设备显示第二用户界面,第二用户界面显示多个日程活动,多个日程活动包括第一日程活动和第二日程活动。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations, the method further includes: the first control device displays a second user interface, and the second user interface displays a plurality of scheduled activities, where the plurality of scheduled activities include the first scheduled event and the second scheduled event.

也就是说,控制设备可以显示活动列表,该活动列表中包括用户设置的多个日程活动,用户可以通过该活动列表查看和管理日程活动的情况。That is to say, the control device can display an activity list, the activity list includes multiple scheduled activities set by the user, and the user can view and manage the status of the scheduled activities through the activity list.

结合第一方面,在一些实施方式中,第一日程活动为:清洁、学习、做饭、出行、睡眠、娱乐或工作。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners, the first schedule activity is: cleaning, studying, cooking, traveling, sleeping, entertaining or working.

可以理解的是,上述第一日程活动为清洁、学习、做饭、出行、睡眠、娱乐或工作为站在家庭应用场景下列举的几个日程活动,在其他应用场景下,该第一日程活动还可以为其他活动,例如,在工作场景下,该第一日程活动还可以为:工作、休息、会议、出差、打卡、汇报等等活动。It can be understood that the above-mentioned first schedule activity is cleaning, learning, cooking, travel, sleep, entertainment or work as several schedule activities listed in the home application scenario. In other application scenarios, the first schedule activity It can also be other activities. For example, in a work scenario, the first schedule activity can also be activities such as work, rest, meeting, business trip, check-in, and report.

第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种电子设备,包括:一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括存储器,一个或多个处理器,以及一个或多个程序;一个或多个处理器在执行一个或多个程序时,使得该电子设备执行如第一方面或第一方面的任意一种实施方式所描述的方法。In the second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, including: an electronic device, which is characterized in that it includes a memory, one or more processors, and one or more programs; one or more processors are executing One or more programs are used to make the electronic device execute the method described in the first aspect or any implementation manner of the first aspect.

第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当指令在电子设备 上运行时,使得计算机执行如第一方面或第一方面的任意一种实施方式所描述的方法。In the third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, and when the instructions are run on the electronic device, the computer executes the method described in the first aspect or any implementation manner of the first aspect .

第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如第一方面或第一方面的任意一种实施方式所描述的方法。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, which, when running on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method described in the first aspect or any implementation manner of the first aspect.

附图说明Description of drawings

图1为一种设备控制方法涉及的用户界面;FIG. 1 is a user interface involved in a device control method;

图2为本申请实施例提供的通信系统的结构示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;

图3为本申请实施例提供的电子设备的硬件结构示意图;图4为本申请实施例提供的一种智能家居应用场景下的日程活动列表示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a schedule activity list in a smart home application scenario provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图5A-图5D、图6A-图6H、图7A-图7J、图8A-图8B、图9A-图9G、图10A-图10B为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面;Figure 5A-Figure 5D, Figure 6A-Figure 6H, Figure 7A-Figure 7J, Figure 8A-Figure 8B, Figure 9A-Figure 9G, Figure 10A-Figure 10B are some user interfaces provided by the embodiment of this application;

图11、图12、图13为本申请实施例提供的活动管理方法相关的流程示意图。FIG. 11 , FIG. 12 , and FIG. 13 are schematic flowcharts related to the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

下面将结合附图对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、详尽地描述。其中,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;文本中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,另外,在本申请实施例的描述中,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described clearly and in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. Among them, in the description of the embodiments of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or means, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in the text is only a description of associated objects The association relationship indicates that there may be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, in the description of the embodiment of the present application , "plurality" means two or more than two.

以下,术语“第一”、“第二”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为暗示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征,在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。Hereinafter, the terms "first" and "second" are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as implying or implying relative importance or implicitly specifying the quantity of indicated technical features. Therefore, the features defined as "first" and "second" may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features. In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the "multiple" The meaning is two or more.

本申请以下实施例中的术语“用户界面(user interface,UI)”,是应用程序或操作系统与用户之间进行交互和信息交换的介质接口,它实现信息的内部形式与用户可以接受形式之间的转换。用户界面是通过java、可扩展标记语言(extensible markup language,XML)等特定计算机语言编写的源代码,界面源代码在电子设备上经过解析,渲染,最终呈现为用户可以识别的内容。用户界面常用的表现形式是图形用户界面(graphic user interface,GUI),是指采用图形方式显示的与计算机操作相关的用户界面。它可以是在电子设备的显示屏中显示的文本、图标、按钮、菜单、选项卡、文本框、对话框、状态栏、导航栏、Widget等可视的界面元素。The term "user interface (UI)" in the following embodiments of this application is a medium interface for interaction and information exchange between an application program or an operating system and a user, and it realizes the difference between the internal form of information and the form acceptable to the user. conversion between. The user interface is the source code written in a specific computer language such as java and extensible markup language (XML). The source code of the interface is parsed and rendered on the electronic device, and finally presented as content that can be recognized by the user. The commonly used form of user interface is the graphical user interface (graphic user interface, GUI), which refers to the user interface related to computer operation displayed in a graphical way. It may be text, icons, buttons, menus, tabs, text boxes, dialog boxes, status bars, navigation bars, Widgets, and other visible interface elements displayed on the display screen of the electronic device.

图1示例性示出了一种设备控制方法涉及的用户界面。Fig. 1 exemplarily shows a user interface involved in a device control method.

如图1所示,以智能家居设备为例,图1中示出的用户界面用于集中设置和管理家庭中各电子设备的工作。其中,该用户界面包括一个或多个设备选项,这一个或多个设备选项分别对应家庭中涉及到的一个或多个电子设备,该电子设备可以是指智能门锁、电视机、摄像头、体脂称、智能台灯、电水壶、冰箱、空气净化器、空调、扫地机器人等等。用户可以通过该用户界面更改这一个或多个电子设备的配置信息,控制这一个或多个电子设备的工作,例如,设置扫地机器人在上午打扫客厅。这样,用户可以通过该用户界面控制家庭中电子设备,使电子设备完成用户安排的活动,帮助用户更好地管理家庭。As shown in FIG. 1 , taking a smart home device as an example, the user interface shown in FIG. 1 is used to centrally set and manage the work of each electronic device in the home. Wherein, the user interface includes one or more equipment options, and the one or more equipment options respectively correspond to one or more electronic equipment involved in the family, and the electronic equipment may refer to smart door locks, televisions, cameras, body Fat scales, smart table lamps, electric kettles, refrigerators, air purifiers, air conditioners, sweeping robots, etc. The user can change the configuration information of the one or more electronic devices through the user interface, and control the work of the one or more electronic devices, for example, setting the sweeping robot to clean the living room in the morning. In this way, the user can control the electronic device in the home through the user interface, so that the electronic device can complete the activities arranged by the user, and help the user manage the family better.

可以看出,该设备控制方法能够集中管理家庭中的电子设备,用户可以仅通过一个电子设备,例如手机,就能够远程控制家庭中的各个电子设备的工作。但是,该方法仍然需要用户对每个电子设备进行配置信息的编排,用户不能直观知晓各个电子设备的工作状态,也不能根据自己的活动安排来统一管控各电子设备的工作,不够智能。因此,如何简化用户的操作,帮助用户更好地控制家庭中多个电子设备的工作,是目前亟待解决的问题。It can be seen that the device control method can centrally manage the electronic devices in the home, and the user can remotely control the work of each electronic device in the home with only one electronic device, such as a mobile phone. However, this method still requires the user to arrange the configuration information of each electronic device, and the user cannot intuitively know the working status of each electronic device, nor can it uniformly control the work of each electronic device according to its own activity arrangement, which is not smart enough. Therefore, how to simplify the user's operation and help the user to better control the work of multiple electronic devices in the home is an urgent problem to be solved at present.

本申请实施例提供一种活动管理方法,该活动管理方法应用于控制设备和工作设备。在该活动管理方法中,控制设备可以获取用户输入的日程活动,该日程活动可以包括工作设备的配置信息,控制设备可将该配置信息发送给该工作设备,以供工作设备根据该配置信息进行工作。An embodiment of the present application provides an activity management method, which is applied to control equipment and working equipment. In the activity management method, the control device can obtain the schedule activity input by the user, and the schedule activity can include the configuration information of the working device, and the control device can send the configuration information to the working device, so that the working device can perform the operation according to the configuration information. Work.

其中,这里的用户是指家庭中的一个或多个家庭成员,也即是说,该用户可以是指一个或多个用户,这一个或多个用户可以在各自登陆有用户账号的控制设备上添加日程活动,并将该日程活动同步到其他用户的控制设备中,控制设备可以将所有的日程活动进行集中显示。这样,用户可以通过自己的手机发布日程活动,其家庭中的其他用户也可以同步查看到该日程活动,即这一个或多个用户可共享并查看这些日程活动。Wherein, the user here refers to one or more family members in the family, that is to say, the user can refer to one or more users, and the one or more users can log in on the control device with a user account respectively Add a schedule activity, and synchronize the schedule activity to other users' control devices, and the control device can centrally display all schedule activities. In this way, the user can publish the schedule activities through his mobile phone, and other users in his family can also view the schedule activities synchronously, that is, the one or more users can share and view the schedule activities.

控制设备或工作设备可以为家庭中涉及到的一个或多个电子设备。控制设备可用于获取日程活动,并将日程活动中的配置信息发送给工作设备,示例性地,控制设备可以为手机、平板、电脑等等移动设备。工作设备可用于接收配置信息,为用户提供该活动相关的服务,该工作设备可以是指为用户提供家庭服务的智能家居以及移动设备,例如,手机、耳机、平板、手环、手表、智能眼镜、电视、电脑、台灯、空气净化器、智能音箱、扫地机器人、冰箱等等。The control device or work device may be one or more electronic devices involved in the home. The control device can be used to obtain the schedule activities, and send the configuration information in the schedule activities to the working device. Exemplarily, the control device can be a mobile device such as a mobile phone, a tablet, or a computer. Work equipment can be used to receive configuration information and provide users with services related to this activity. The work equipment can refer to smart home and mobile devices that provide users with home services, such as mobile phones, earphones, tablets, bracelets, watches, smart glasses , TV, computer, desk lamp, air purifier, smart speaker, sweeping robot, refrigerator, etc.

配置信息可用于指示工作设备的工作状态。该配置信息可以包括:工作时间、工作参数,其中,工作参数可以包括但不限于音量、温度、范围、距离、工作模式或亮度等等参数。不同的工作设备的配置信息包含的参数可以不同,具体关于工作设备的配置信息由工作设备所提供的服务决定。例如,扫地机器人的参数可以包括:工作时间、范围、工作模式等等,智能台灯的参数可以包括:工作时间、亮度、工作模式等等。The configuration information can be used to indicate the working status of the working device. The configuration information may include: working time and working parameters, wherein the working parameters may include but not limited to parameters such as volume, temperature, range, distance, working mode or brightness. The parameters included in the configuration information of different working devices may be different, and the specific configuration information about the working device is determined by the services provided by the working device. For example, the parameters of the sweeping robot may include: working time, range, working mode, etc., and the parameters of the smart desk lamp may include: working time, brightness, working mode, etc.

总的来说,本申请实施例提供的活动管理方法,能够对家庭中所有成员发布的日程活动进行集中显示,帮助家庭中的所有家庭成员更好地了解到家庭中的日程活动,并且,用户可以通过发布活动,控制家庭中一个或多个电子设备的工作,便捷用户的操作,为用户提供全场景化的数字生活体验,提升用户的体验感。In general, the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application can centrally display the schedule activities published by all members of the family, and help all family members in the family to better understand the schedule activities in the family, and the user By publishing activities, you can control the work of one or more electronic devices in the home, facilitate user operations, provide users with a full-scenario digital life experience, and improve user experience.

在一些实施例中,该活动管理方法除了能够获取用户输入的多个日程活动外,还可以根据控制设备获取的信息生成日程活动,例如,当控制设备通过学习类应用获取到用户预约有一个网络课程,控制设备可以自动根据该网络课程的信息生成一个日程活动。具体关于获取日程活动的方式可以参见后续内容,这里先不赘述。In some embodiments, the activity management method can not only acquire multiple schedule activities input by the user, but also generate schedule activities according to the information acquired by the control device. For example, when the control device acquires that the user has reserved a network Course, the control device can automatically generate a schedule activity according to the information of the network course. For details on how to obtain schedule events, please refer to the follow-up content, so I won’t go into details here.

在一些实施例中,工作设备还可以调整日程活动中存在冲突的活动,避免工作设备出现工作冲突的情况。具体地,日程活动中还包括:活动属性、活动优先级。活动属性用于对日程活动进行分类,指示日程活动所属的类型,例如,该活动属性可以包括:睡眠、学习、出行、做饭、工作、娱乐、清洁等等。活动优先级用于对各日程活动的执行顺序进行排序,例如,高优先级的日程活动优先执行,低优先级的日程活动延后执行或者不执行。具体地,可以为不同的活动属性设置不同的活动优先级,例如,睡眠、学习、出行、做饭、工作、娱乐、清洁的优先级从高到低。当存在冲突的日程活动时,可以优先满足高优先级的日程活动的活 动内容,避免高优先级的日程活动被其他活动干扰。这样,可以实现对设备远程控制的同时,使各个工作设备能够井然有序地工作,为用户提供更加智能化的服务。具体关于日程活动的冲突,以及冲突的调整可以参见后续内容,这里先不赘述。In some embodiments, the working device can also adjust the conflicting activities in the schedule activities, so as to avoid work conflicts of the working device. Specifically, the schedule activity also includes: activity attribute and activity priority. The activity attributes are used to classify the schedule activities and indicate the types of the schedule activities. For example, the activity attributes may include: sleep, study, travel, cooking, work, entertainment, cleaning and so on. The activity priority is used to sort the execution order of each schedule activity, for example, the schedule activity with high priority is executed first, and the schedule activity with low priority is delayed or not executed. Specifically, different activity priorities may be set for different activity attributes, for example, the priorities of sleep, study, travel, cooking, work, entertainment, and cleaning are from high to low. When there are conflicting schedule activities, the content of the high-priority schedule activities can be satisfied first, and the high-priority schedule activities are prevented from being interfered by other activities. In this way, the remote control of the equipment can be realized, and at the same time, each working equipment can work in an orderly manner, providing users with more intelligent services. For details about the conflicts of schedule activities and the adjustment of conflicts, please refer to the follow-up content, so I won't go into details here.

图2示例性示出了本申请实施例涉及的通信系统1000的结构示意图。FIG. 2 exemplarily shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication system 1000 involved in the embodiment of the present application.

如图2所示,该通信系统1000包含家庭中的一个或多个电子设备,这一个或多个电子设备包括用户随身携带的移动设备,例如,手机、耳机、平板、手环、手表、智能眼镜等等,以及安置在家庭中的智能家电,例如,电视、电脑、台灯、空气净化器、智能音箱、扫地机器人、冰箱等等。这一个或多个电子设备可以分为两类设备:一类是下发配置信息的控制设备,一类是接收配置信息的工作设备。As shown in Figure 2, the communication system 1000 includes one or more electronic devices in the home, and the one or more electronic devices include mobile devices carried by users, such as mobile phones, earphones, tablets, bracelets, watches, smart phones, etc. Glasses, etc., as well as smart home appliances placed in the home, such as TVs, computers, desk lamps, air purifiers, smart speakers, sweeping robots, refrigerators, etc. The one or more electronic devices can be divided into two types of devices: one is a control device that sends configuration information, and the other is a working device that receives configuration information.

其中,控制设备用于接收用户输入的日程活动,并根据日程活动确定存在冲突的场景,调整日程活动的执行顺序,与工作设备建立通信连接,向工作设备下发配置信息,控制工作设备的工作。控制设备可以包括一个或多个设备,即一个或多个家庭成员可以在各自登录有用户账号的控制设备上添加日程活动,这一个或多个家庭成员可以通过各自的控制设备共享并查看这些日程活动。示例性地,该控制设备可以是指面向用户的终端设备,例如,手机、平板、电脑等等。Among them, the control device is used to receive the schedule activities input by the user, determine conflicting scenarios according to the schedule activities, adjust the execution sequence of the schedule activities, establish communication connections with the working equipment, send configuration information to the working equipment, and control the work of the working equipment. . The control device can include one or more devices, that is, one or more family members can add schedule activities on the control device with their own user accounts logged in, and the one or more family members can share and view these schedules through their respective control devices Activity. Exemplarily, the control device may refer to a user-oriented terminal device, such as a mobile phone, a tablet, a computer, and the like.

该通信连接可以为有线连接、无线连接。具体地,无线连接可以是高保真无线通信(Wi-Fi)连接、蓝牙连接、红外线连接、NFC连接、ZigBee连接等近距离连接。另外,无线连接还可以是远距离连接,远距离连接包括但不限于支持2G,3G,4G,5G以及后续标准协议的移动网络。例如,多个电子设备可以登录同一用户账号(例如华为账号),然后通过服务器进行远距离连接。The communication connection may be a wired connection or a wireless connection. Specifically, the wireless connection may be a high-fidelity wireless communication (Wi-Fi) connection, a Bluetooth connection, an infrared connection, an NFC connection, a ZigBee connection, or a short-distance connection. In addition, the wireless connection may also be a long-distance connection, and the long-distance connection includes but is not limited to mobile networks supporting 2G, 3G, 4G, 5G and subsequent standard protocols. For example, multiple electronic devices can log in to the same user account (such as a Huawei account), and then connect remotely through the server.

工作设备用于接受控制设备下发的配置信息,根据该配置信息调整工作状态,为用户提供不同日程活动下针对性的家庭服务。工作设备可以包括一个或多个设备,该工作设备可以是指为用户提供家庭服务的智能家居以及移动设备,例如,手机、耳机、平板、手环、手表、智能眼镜、电视、电脑、台灯、空气净化器、智能音箱、扫地机器人、冰箱等等。The working device is used to receive the configuration information issued by the control device, adjust the working status according to the configuration information, and provide users with targeted home services under different schedule activities. The working device may include one or more devices, which may refer to smart home and mobile devices that provide home services for users, such as mobile phones, earphones, tablets, bracelets, watches, smart glasses, TVs, computers, desk lamps, Air purifiers, smart speakers, robot vacuums, refrigerators, and more.

图2示例性示出的电子设备1011-1015即为工作设备,分别为:智能音箱、扫地机器人、智能台灯、平板、手表,电子设备1021-1023即为控制设备,电子设备1021-1023可以分别不同家庭成员,例如爸爸、妈妈和小朋友的手机。The electronic devices 1011-1015 exemplarily shown in FIG. 2 are working devices, which are respectively: smart speakers, sweeping robots, smart desk lamps, tablets, and watches. Electronic devices 1021-1023 are control devices. Electronic devices 1021-1023 can be Mobile phones of different family members, such as father, mother and children.

可以理解的是,控制设备也可以同时为工作设备,工作设备也可以同时为控制设备,这里的控制设备和工作设备的分类只是为了更清楚地描述本方案,不构成对本申请实施例的限制,另外,图2示出了通信系统1000仅仅作为示例,在本申请其他实施例中,该通信系统1000可以包含更多或更少的电子设备,本申请实施例对此不作限制。It can be understood that the control device can also be the working device at the same time, and the working device can also be the control device at the same time. The classification of the control device and the working device here is only to describe the solution more clearly, and does not constitute a limitation to the embodiment of the application. In addition, FIG. 2 shows the communication system 1000 as an example only. In other embodiments of the present application, the communication system 1000 may include more or less electronic devices, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.

图3示出了电子设备100的硬件结构示意图。FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of the electronic device 100 .

电子设备100可以是手机、平板电脑、桌面型计算机、膝上型计算机、手持计算机、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本,以及蜂窝电话、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)设备、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)设备、可穿戴式设备、车载设备、智能家居设备和/或智慧城市设备,本申请实施例对该电子设备的具体类型不作特殊限制。该电子设备100即为上述通信系统1000中提及的控制设备,具体关于控制设备的描述可以参见前述内容,这里不再赘述。The electronic device 100 may be a cell phone, a tablet computer, a desktop computer, a laptop computer, a handheld computer, a notebook computer, an ultra-mobile personal computer (UMPC), a netbook, as well as a cellular phone, a personal digital assistant (personal digital assistant) digital assistant (PDA), augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) device, virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) device, artificial intelligence (artificial intelligence, AI) device, wearable device, vehicle-mounted device, smart home device and/or For smart city equipment, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific type of the electronic equipment. The electronic device 100 is the control device mentioned in the above-mentioned communication system 1000. For the specific description of the control device, please refer to the foregoing content, which will not be repeated here.

电子设备可以是搭载iOS、Android、Microsoft或者其它操作系统的便携式终端设备,例如手机、平板电脑、可穿戴设备等,还可以是具有触敏表面或触控面板的膝上型计算机(Laptop)、具有触敏表面或触控面板的台式计算机等非便携式终端设备。电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。The electronic device can be a portable terminal device equipped with iOS, Android, Microsoft or other operating systems, such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wearable device, etc., or a laptop computer (Laptop) with a touch-sensitive surface or a touch panel, Non-portable terminal devices such as desktop computers with touch-sensitive surfaces or touch panels. The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a micro-kernel architecture, a micro-service architecture, or a cloud architecture.

电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, and an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, earphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and A subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and the like. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, an ambient light sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.

可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that, the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine certain components, or separate certain components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components can be realized in hardware, software or a combination of software and hardware.

处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example: the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.

控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction opcode and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing the instruction.

在一些实施例中,处理器110可用于根据用户输入日程活动判断是否存在冲突的日程活动,或者,进一步地,根据电子设备100采集的信息或者与电子设备100建立连接的其他电子设备采集的信息生成日程活动,从而结合用户输入的日程活动判断是否存在冲突的场景,根据活动的优先级控制工作设备的工作状态。具体关于工作设备的描述参见前述内容,这里不再赘述,具体关于电子设备100获得日程活动、对冲突的日程活动的判断以及对工作设备的控制的描述可以参见后续内容,这里先不赘述。In some embodiments, the processor 110 may be configured to determine whether there is a conflicting schedule activity according to the schedule activity input by the user, or, further, according to information collected by the electronic device 100 or information collected by other electronic devices connected to the electronic device 100 Generate schedule activities to judge whether there are conflicting scenarios combined with the schedule activities input by the user, and control the working status of the working equipment according to the priority of the activities. For the specific description of the working device, refer to the foregoing content, which will not be repeated here. For the specific description of the electronic device 100 obtaining the schedule activity, judging the conflicting schedule activity, and controlling the working device, please refer to the subsequent content, and will not repeat it here.

处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is a cache memory. The memory may hold instructions or data that the processor 110 has just used or recycled. If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided, and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby improving the efficiency of the system.

充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The charging management module 140 is configured to receive a charging input from a charger. The power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 . The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be realized by the antenna 1 , the antenna 2 , the mobile communication module 150 , the wireless communication module 160 , a modem processor, a baseband processor, and the like.

天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be multiplexed to improve the utilization of the antennas. For example: Antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of a wireless local area network.

移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解 决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。The mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (low noise amplifier, LNA) and the like. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and send them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signals modulated by the modem processor, and convert them into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.

无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号解调以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide wireless local area networks (wireless local area networks, WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, Wi-Fi) network), bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), global navigation satellite, etc. applied on the electronic device 100. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , demodulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , frequency-modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.

在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150以及无线通信模块160这两个通信模块可用于与其他控制设备以及工作设备建立通信连接,向其他控制设备发送电子设备100上获取到的日程活动,接收其他控制设备上获取到的日程活动,向工作设备发送配置信息,接收工作设备请求获取配置信息的指示信息等等。In some embodiments, the two communication modules, the mobile communication module 150 and the wireless communication module 160, can be used to establish communication connections with other control devices and working devices, send the schedule activities obtained on the electronic device 100 to other control devices, and receive other Control the schedule activities obtained on the device, send configuration information to the working device, receive instructions from the working device requesting to obtain configuration information, and so on.

电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 100 realizes the display function through the GPU, the display screen 194 , and the application processor. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or change display information.

显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode的,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos and the like. The display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diodes (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED), etc.

在一些实施例中,显示屏194可以用于显示该活动管理方法涉及到的用户界面,例如,显示提示用户输入日程活动的用户界面,显示日程活动列表的用户界面等等,具体关于显示屏194显示的用户界面参见后续UI实施例,这里先不赘述。In some embodiments, the display screen 194 can be used to display the user interface involved in the activity management method, for example, display a user interface that prompts the user to input a schedule activity, a user interface that displays a list of schedule activities, etc., specifically about the display screen 194 For the displayed user interface, refer to subsequent UI embodiments, and details will not be described here.

摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object generates an optical image through the lens and projects it to the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the light signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. The ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other image signals.

在一些实施例中,摄像头193可用于采集用户的头像,以供用户创建家庭成员账号,或者采集家庭成员的账号二维码,或者家庭二维码,以供用户将其他成员添加到家庭中,或加入家庭,具体关于创建家庭成员和创建家庭的描述参见后续UI实施例,这里先不赘述。In some embodiments, the camera 193 can be used to collect the user's avatar for the user to create a family member account, or collect the account QR code of the family member, or the family QR code for the user to add other members to the family, Or join a family. For specific descriptions about creating family members and creating a family, refer to the subsequent UI embodiments, which will not be repeated here.

内部存储器121可以包括一个或多个随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)和一个或多个非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory,NVM)。The internal memory 121 may include one or more random access memories (random access memory, RAM) and one or more non-volatile memories (non-volatile memory, NVM).

外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部的非易失性存储器,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external non-volatile memory, so as to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100 .

电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170 , the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the earphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.

音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signal. Speaker 170A, also referred to as a "horn", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. Receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. The earphone interface 170D is used for connecting wired earphones.

压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。气压传感器180C用于测量气压。磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。温度传感器180J用于检测温度。触摸传感器180K,也称“触控器件”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。按键190包括开机键,音量键等。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal. The gyro sensor 180B can be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 . The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 may use the magnetic sensor 180D to detect the opening and closing of the flip leather case. The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). The distance sensor 180F is used to measure the distance. Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes. The light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light through the light emitting diode. Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. The ambient light sensor 180L is used for sensing ambient light brightness. The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to implement fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, take pictures with fingerprints, answer incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like. The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. The touch sensor 180K is also called "touch device". The touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194, and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. Visual output related to the touch operation can be provided through the display screen 194 . The bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. The keys 190 include a power key, a volume key and the like.

按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。马达191可以产生振动提示。指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。The key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The motor 191 can generate a vibrating reminder. The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, and can be used to indicate charging status, power change, and can also be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, and the like. The SIM card interface 195 is used for connecting a SIM card.

需要注意的是,本申请实施例提供的活动管理方法可以存在多种应用场景:It should be noted that the activity management method provided in the embodiment of this application can have various application scenarios:

1)智能家居1) Smart home

在智能家居的应用场景下,该活动管理方法可以涉及到家庭中的一个或多个家庭设备,包括:手机、电脑、平板、手环、手表、智能台灯、冰箱、空调、空气净化器、智能音箱、扫地机器人等等。该活动管理方法能够获取多个日程活动,控制这一个或多个家庭设备的工作状态,进一步地,根据活动优先级,优先执行存在冲突的活动中,优先级高的活动,日程活动避免家庭设备出现工作冲突的问题,便捷用户的操作,提升用户的居家体验感。In the application scenario of smart home, the activity management method can involve one or more home devices in the family, including: mobile phones, computers, tablets, bracelets, watches, smart desk lamps, refrigerators, air conditioners, air purifiers, smart Speakers, sweeping robots, etc. The activity management method can obtain multiple schedule activities and control the working status of the one or more home devices. Further, according to the priority of the activities, the activities with higher priority among the conflicting activities are executed first, and the schedule activities avoid the family devices. There is a problem of work conflict, which facilitates the user's operation and improves the user's home experience.

图4示例性示出了一种智能家居应用场景下的日程活动列表示意图。从图4可以看出,仅仅从照顾小朋友的起居方面展开,日程活动就可以包括:家务、消费、出行、自律、安全等方面的活动。其中,具体可以包括:打扫、浇水、就餐、餐饮管理、活动监控、日程安排、家庭安全管理等等活动。这些活动可以分为无管控的小朋友活动,有管控的小朋友活动以及超级终端活动。其中,无管控的小朋友活动为不需要其他人介入的活动,有管控的小朋友活动为需要其他人介入的活动,超级终端活动为家庭中的一个或多个家庭设备起主导工作的活动。而不论是家庭设备起主导作用、辅导作用,亦或是不需要智能家居参与的活动,都需要人为参与活动的编排、管理和协调。为了减轻用户的工作量,可以使用本申请实施例提供的活动管理方法,将这些活动通过电子设备进行集中管理,并减少日程活动冲突的概率,为家庭创建全场景智能数字化的生活体验。Fig. 4 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a schedule activity list in a smart home application scenario. It can be seen from Figure 4 that just starting from the daily life of taking care of children, the daily activities can include: housework, consumption, travel, self-discipline, safety and other activities. Among them, it can specifically include: cleaning, watering, dining, catering management, activity monitoring, schedule arrangement, family safety management and other activities. These activities can be divided into uncontrolled children's activities, controlled children's activities and super terminal activities. Among them, uncontrolled children's activities are activities that do not require other people's intervention, controlled children's activities are activities that require other people's intervention, and super terminal activities are activities in which one or more home devices in the family play a leading role. Regardless of whether the home device plays a leading role, a counseling role, or an activity that does not require the participation of a smart home, human participation in the arrangement, management and coordination of activities is required. In order to reduce the user's workload, the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application can be used to centrally manage these activities through electronic devices, reduce the probability of schedule activity conflicts, and create a full-scenario intelligent digital life experience for the family.

2)智慧办公2) Smart office

在智慧办公的应用场景下,该活动管理方法可以涉及到公司中的一个或多个办公设备, 包括:手机、电脑、饮水机、打印机、灯具、投影仪、空调、摄像头等等。该活动管理方法能够获取多个工作活动,其中,该用户可以是指公司员工、访客或其他人员,该工作活动可以包括:会议安排、添水、电器维修、访客提醒、会议提醒、安全监控、温度调节等等活动,该活动管理方法可以根据用户设置的工作活动,控制这一个或多个办公设备的工作状态,进一步地,根据活动的优先级,优先执行存在冲突的活动中,优先级高的活动,使各个办公设备能够在不冲突的情况下井然有序的工作,便捷用户的操作,提升用户的办公体验感。In the application scenario of smart office, the activity management method may involve one or more office equipment in the company, including: mobile phones, computers, drinking fountains, printers, lamps, projectors, air conditioners, cameras and so on. The activity management method can obtain multiple work activities, wherein the user can refer to company employees, visitors or other personnel, and the work activities can include: meeting arrangement, water refill, electrical appliance repair, visitor reminder, meeting reminder, security monitoring, temperature Adjustment and other activities, the activity management method can control the working status of the one or more office equipment according to the work activities set by the user, and further, according to the priority of the activity, give priority to the execution of conflicting activities, the one with the higher priority Activities, so that each office equipment can work in an orderly manner without conflict, facilitate the user's operation, and enhance the user's office experience.

3)智慧医疗3) Smart healthcare

在智慧医疗的应用场景下,该活动管理方法可以涉及到医院中的一个或多个医疗设备,包括:手机、电脑、显示屏、音箱、车床、对讲信号机、多功能监护仪、饮水机等等。该活动管理方法能够获取用户输入的多个医疗活动,其中,该用户可以是指医生、护士、病人、或其他人员,该医疗活动可以包括:挂号、就诊、登记、急诊、取药、缴费、就诊提醒等等活动,该活动管理方法可以根据用户设置的日程活动,控制这一个或多个医疗设备的工作状态,进一步地,根据活动的优先级,优先执行存在冲突的活动中,优先级高的活动,使各个医疗设备能够在不冲突的情况下井然有序的工作,便捷用户的操作,并根据该活动提升用户在医院就职或就诊的体验感。In the application scenario of smart medical care, this activity management method can involve one or more medical devices in the hospital, including: mobile phones, computers, display screens, speakers, lathes, intercom signals, multi-function monitors, water dispensers etc. The activity management method can acquire a plurality of medical activities input by the user, wherein the user may refer to a doctor, nurse, patient, or other personnel, and the medical activities may include: registration, medical treatment, registration, emergency treatment, medicine collection, payment, For activities such as medical reminders, the activity management method can control the working status of the one or more medical devices according to the schedule activities set by the user. Further, according to the priority of the activity, the conflicting activities are prioritized, and the priority is higher. The activity enables each medical device to work in an orderly manner without conflicts, facilitates the user's operation, and improves the user's experience of finding a job or seeing a doctor in the hospital based on this activity.

可以理解的是,不限于上述提及的应用场景,在本申请其他实施例中,还可以涉及物流、农业、交通、安防、建筑、能源、制造、零售、自动驾驶、多设备管理、专家系统、自动决策系统等等应用场景,本申请实施例对此不作限制。It can be understood that it is not limited to the application scenarios mentioned above. In other embodiments of the present application, it can also involve logistics, agriculture, transportation, security, construction, energy, manufacturing, retail, automatic driving, multi-device management, and expert systems. , automatic decision-making system and other application scenarios, which are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.

下面结合图5A-图5D、图6A-图6H、图7A-图7J、图8A-图8B、图9A-图9G、图10A-图10B介绍本申请实施例在智能家居的应用场景下,涉及到的用户界面。The following describes the application of the embodiment of the present application in the smart home application scenario with reference to Figures 5A-5D, 6A-6H, 7A-7J, 8A-8B, 9A-9G, and 10A-10B. Involved user interface.

图5A-图5D图示例性示出了电子设备100创建家庭成员账户涉及到的一些用户界面。5A-5D schematically illustrate some user interfaces involved in creating a family member account by the electronic device 100 .

图5A示例性示出了用户首次打开分布式日程应用时,该应用提供的默认用户界面21。其中,其中,分布式日程应用用于为用户提供输入日程活动的用户界面,获取用户输入的日程活动,或根据获取的信息生成日程活动,接收其他设备发送的日程活动等等,并根据获得的日程活动来判断是否存在冲突的日程活动,如果存在,则根据活动的优先级来调整日程活动中各设备的工作状态,并显示家庭中安排的日程活动。总的来说,该分布式日程应用用于集中管理日程活动,控制家庭中的各个电子设备的工作状态,使各电子设备能够各司其职,为用户提供完善、人性化的智慧生活服务。FIG. 5A exemplarily shows the default user interface 21 provided by the application when the user opens the distributed calendar application for the first time. Among them, the distributed schedule application is used to provide users with a user interface for inputting schedule activities, obtain the schedule activities input by users, or generate schedule activities according to the obtained information, receive schedule activities sent by other devices, etc., and based on the obtained The schedule activities are used to determine whether there are conflicting schedule activities. If there are, the working status of each device in the schedule activities is adjusted according to the priority of the activities, and the schedule activities arranged in the family are displayed. In general, the distributed schedule application is used to centrally manage schedule activities, control the working status of each electronic device in the home, enable each electronic device to perform its own duties, and provide users with comprehensive and humanized smart life services.

用户界面21用于提示用户创建家庭成员账号。用户界面21可以包括:菜单栏211、账号创建控件212。菜单栏211可以包括:主页选项211A、日程选项211B、我的选项211C这三个选项,示例性地,如图5A所示,选项中的文字下方包含下划线时说明该选项处于选中状态。其中,当主页选项211A处于选中状态时,用户界面21用于显示主页选项211A对应的子页面,该子页面用于展示与电子设备100建立过通信连接的工作设备,当日程选项211B处于选中状态时,用户界面21用于显示日程选项211B对应的子页面,该子页面用于展示日程活动,当我的选项211C处于选中状态时,用户界面21用于显示我的选项211C对应的子页面,该子页面用于展示与账号有关的信息。在如图5A所示的用户界面21中,我的选项211C处于选中状态,在用户首次打开分布式日程应用时,用户界面21中显示的账号创建控件212用于提示用户创建家庭成员账号。当电子设备100检测到用户作用于账号创建控件212的触控操作时,电子设备100显示如图5B所示的用户界面22。The user interface 21 is used to prompt the user to create a family member account. The user interface 21 may include: a menu bar 211 and an account creation control 212 . The menu bar 211 may include: home page option 211A, schedule option 211B, and my option 211C. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 5A , when the text in an option is underlined, it means that the option is selected. Wherein, when the homepage option 211A is in the selected state, the user interface 21 is used to display the subpage corresponding to the homepage option 211A, and the subpage is used to display the working equipment that has established a communication connection with the electronic device 100. , the user interface 21 is used to display the subpage corresponding to the schedule option 211B, and the subpage is used to display the schedule activities. When the option 211C is selected, the user interface 21 is used to display the subpage corresponding to the option 211C. This subpage is used to display information related to the account. In the user interface 21 shown in FIG. 5A , the My option 211C is selected. When the user opens the distributed calendar application for the first time, the account creation control 212 displayed in the user interface 21 is used to prompt the user to create a family member account. When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the account creation control 212 , the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 22 as shown in FIG. 5B .

可选地,电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于分布式日程应用的图标的触控操作,响应 于该操作,打开该分布式日程应用,其中,该图标可以显示在电子设备100的桌面上,也可以为位于设置应用提供的用户界面中的图标,也可以为下拉菜单栏中的图标。或者,电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于打开分布式日程应用的语音指令,响应于该语音指令,打开该分布式日程应用。本申请实施例对该分布式日程应用的开启方式不做限制。Optionally, the electronic device 100 may detect a user's touch operation on the icon of the distributed schedule application, and in response to the operation, open the distributed schedule application, wherein the icon may be displayed on the desktop of the electronic device 100, It may also be an icon located in a user interface provided by a setting application, or an icon in a drop-down menu bar. Alternatively, the electronic device 100 may detect a user's voice command for opening the distributed calendar application, and respond to the voice command to open the distributed calendar application. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the way to start the distributed schedule application.

如图5B所示,用户界面22可以包括:返回控件221、信息输入窗口222。其中,信息输入窗口222用于输入账号的名称,例如“180XXXXXXXX”。之后,电子设备100可以接收到用户作用于返回控件221的触控操作后,将信息输入窗口222中填写的信息作为用户创建的家庭成员的账号名称。As shown in FIG. 5B , the user interface 22 may include: a return control 221 and an information input window 222 . Wherein, the information input window 222 is used to input the name of the account, such as "180XXXXXXXX". Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may use the information filled in the information input window 222 as the account name of the family member created by the user after receiving the user's touch operation on the return control 221 .

之后,电子设备100可以显示如图5C所示的用户界面23,该用户界面23用于设置账号的头像。Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 23 as shown in FIG. 5C , where the user interface 23 is used to set the avatar of the account.

如图5C所示,用户界面23可以包括:取消控件231、确认控件232、图片选择区域233。其中,取消控件231用于取消设置账号的头像,确定控件232用于确定用户设置的账号头像,图片选择区域233用于选择账号的头像。其中,图片选择区域233可以包括拍照图标233A、第一图片233B、第二图片233C。拍照图标233A可以接收到用户的触控操作,并响应于该操作开启摄像头,用户可以通过即时拍摄照片来作为账号的头像。第一图片233B和第二图片233C可以为图库应用中包含的图片,用户可以选择第一图片233B或第二图片233C对应的图片作为账号的头像。As shown in FIG. 5C , the user interface 23 may include: a cancel control 231 , a confirmation control 232 , and a picture selection area 233 . Wherein, the cancel control 231 is used to cancel setting the profile picture of the account, the confirmation control 232 is used to confirm the profile picture of the account set by the user, and the picture selection area 233 is used to select the profile picture of the account. Wherein, the picture selection area 233 may include a camera icon 233A, a first picture 233B, and a second picture 233C. The camera icon 233A may receive a user's touch operation, and turn on the camera in response to the operation, and the user may immediately take a photo as the avatar of the account. The first picture 233B and the second picture 233C may be pictures included in the gallery application, and the user may select the picture corresponding to the first picture 233B or the second picture 233C as the avatar of the account.

之后,电子设备100可以在账号创建完成后显示如图5D所示的用户界面24。Afterwards, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 24 shown in FIG. 5D after the account is created.

如图5D所示,用户界面24用于显示用户创建的家庭成员的账号的二维码,即二维码241,用户可以在账号创建完成后,将该二维码展示给其他用户,以供其他用户将用户创建的账号加入家庭中,同时,电子设备100也可以扫描其他用户的二维码,将其他用户的账号加入到自己所在的家庭中。As shown in Figure 5D, the user interface 24 is used to display the two-dimensional code of the account number of the family member created by the user, that is, the two-dimensional code 241. After the account is created, the user can show the two-dimensional code to other users for future use. Other users add the account created by the user to the family. At the same time, the electronic device 100 can also scan the QR code of the other user to add the account of the other user to the family it is in.

可以看出,图5A-图5D示出了电子设备100创建家庭成员账号的过程,这样,用户可以通过账号来查看和管理日程活动,为用户提供智能化的管理。之后,电子设备100可以根据该账号与其他用户创建的账号组成一个群组,该群组即为家庭,家庭中的各用户可以在自己的电子设备上安排日程活动,家庭中的各用户可以共享和查看这些日程活动。It can be seen that FIG. 5A-FIG. 5D show the process of creating a family member account by the electronic device 100, so that the user can view and manage schedule activities through the account, providing intelligent management for the user. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 can form a group based on the account and accounts created by other users. This group is a family. Each user in the family can arrange schedule activities on his own electronic device, and each user in the family can share and view these scheduled events.

图6A-图6H示例性示出了电子设备100创建和管理家庭涉及到的一些用户界面。6A-6H exemplarily show some user interfaces involved in creating and managing families by the electronic device 100 .

如图6A所示,用户界面31用于创建家庭的名称。其中,用户界面31可以包括:返回控件311、信息输入窗口312。其中,返回控件311用于退出设置家庭的名称,将信息输入窗口312中输入的信息作为家庭的名称。如图6A所示,用户可以在信息输入窗口312中输入“相亲相爱一家人”作为家庭的名称。As shown in Figure 6A, the user interface 31 is used to create the name of the family. Wherein, the user interface 31 may include: a return control 311 and an information input window 312 . Wherein, the return control 311 is used to quit setting the name of the family, and the information input in the information input window 312 is used as the name of the family. As shown in FIG. 6A , the user may input "a family that loves each other" in the information input window 312 as the name of the family.

之后,在家庭创建完成后,电子设备100可以显示如图6B所示的用户界面32。该用户界面32可用于提示用户进一步管理该家庭。Afterwards, after the family is created, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 32 as shown in FIG. 6B . The user interface 32 can be used to prompt the user to further manage the household.

如图6B所示,用户界面32可以包括:返回控件321、设置窗口322。其中,返回控件321可用于退出用户界面32,返回到上一级页面或分布式日程应用的主页面。设置窗口322可以包括:邀请选项322A和设置选项322B。其中,邀请选项322A可用于邀请其他用户加入到该家庭中,设置选项322B可用于设置该家庭的信息。As shown in FIG. 6B , the user interface 32 may include: a return control 321 and a setting window 322 . Wherein, the return control 321 can be used to exit the user interface 32 and return to the upper level page or the main page of the distributed schedule application. Settings window 322 may include: an invite option 322A and a settings option 322B. Among them, the invitation option 322A can be used to invite other users to join the family, and the setting option 322B can be used to set the information of the family.

其中,电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于图6B中的邀请选项322A的触控操作,响应于该操作,显示如图6C所示的用户界面33。Wherein, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's touch operation on the invite option 322A in FIG. 6B , and in response to the operation, display the user interface 33 as shown in FIG. 6C .

如图6C所示,用户界面33可以包括:返回控件331、二维码332、信息输入区域333、 扫码图标334、确认控件335。其中,返回控件331可用于退出用户界面33,返回到上一级页面(例如用户界面32)或分布式日程应用的主页面。二维码332为该家庭对应的家庭二维码,用户可以将该家庭二维码展示给其他用户,以供其他用户加入到该家庭中。信息输入区域333可用于用户输入其他用户的手机号,以供电子设备100根据该手机号将其他用户加入到该家庭中,或者,电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于扫码图标334的触控操作,响应于该操作,开启摄像头,通过摄像头采集其他用户创建的家庭成员账号的二维码(例如图5D所示的二维码241),将其他用户加入到该家庭中。确认控件335可用于完成家庭成员的邀请。As shown in FIG. 6C , the user interface 33 may include: a return control 331 , a two-dimensional code 332 , an information input area 333 , a code scanning icon 334 , and a confirmation control 335 . Wherein, the return control 331 can be used to exit the user interface 33 and return to the upper level page (such as the user interface 32 ) or the main page of the distributed schedule application. The QR code 332 is the family QR code corresponding to the family, and the user can show the family QR code to other users so that other users can join the family. The information input area 333 can be used for the user to input the mobile phone number of other users, so that the electronic device 100 can add other users to the family according to the mobile phone number, or the electronic device 100 can detect the user's touch on the code scanning icon 334 Operation, in response to the operation, turn on the camera, collect the QR codes (such as the QR code 241 shown in FIG. 5D ) of family member accounts created by other users through the camera, and add other users to the family. A confirmation control 335 may be used to complete the family member's invitation.

另外,电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于图6B中的设置选项322B的触控操作,响应于该操作,显示如图6D所示的用户界面34。In addition, the electronic device 100 may detect a user's touch operation on the setting option 322B in FIG. 6B , and in response to the operation, display the user interface 34 as shown in FIG. 6D .

如图6D所示,用户界面34可以包括:返回控件341、家庭成员列表342、信息展示窗口343。其中,返回控件341可用于退出用户界面34,返回到上一级页面(例如用户界面32)或分布式日程应用的主页面。家庭成员列表342可用于展示该家庭中包含的家庭成员,其中,家庭成员列表342可以包括成员图标342A、邀请图标342B。成员图标342A可以电子设备100对应的用户创建的账号,该成员图标342A可以显示有账号头像和账号名称,邀请图标342B可用于邀请其他用户进入该家庭。在邀请成功后,其他用户对应的账号头像和账号名称也会同步显示在家庭成员列表342中。信息展示窗口343用于展示家庭的相关信息,其中,信息展示窗口343C可以包括:家庭名称343A、家庭二维码343B以及昵称343C。家庭名称343A用于显示和设置该家庭的名称,家庭二维码343B用于触发显示该家庭的二维码,以供其他用户扫描该二维码进入该家庭,昵称343C可用于显示和设置用户在该家庭中的昵称。As shown in FIG. 6D , the user interface 34 may include: a return control 341 , a list of family members 342 , and an information display window 343 . Wherein, the return control 341 can be used to exit the user interface 34 and return to the upper level page (such as the user interface 32 ) or the main page of the distributed schedule application. The family member list 342 can be used to display the family members contained in the family, wherein the family member list 342 can include a member icon 342A and an invitation icon 342B. The member icon 342A may be an account created by the user corresponding to the electronic device 100, and the member icon 342A may display an account avatar and account name, and the invitation icon 342B may be used to invite other users to enter the family. After the invitation is successful, the account avatars and account names corresponding to other users will also be displayed in the family member list 342 synchronously. The information display window 343 is used to display relevant information of the family, wherein the information display window 343C may include: a family name 343A, a family QR code 343B and a nickname 343C. The family name 343A is used to display and set the name of the family, the family QR code 343B is used to trigger the display of the family’s QR code for other users to scan the QR code to enter the family, and the nickname 343C can be used to display and set the user name. A nickname within the family.

其中,电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于图6D中的家庭二维码343B的触控操作,响应于该操作,显示如图6E所示的用户界面35。该用户界面35用于显示家庭二维码。Wherein, the electronic device 100 may detect the user's touch operation on the home QR code 343B in FIG. 6D , and in response to the operation, display the user interface 35 as shown in FIG. 6E . The user interface 35 is used to display the family QR code.

如图6E所示,用户界面35可以包括返回控件351、二维码352。其中,返回控件351可用于退出用户界面35,返回到上一级页面(例如用户界面34)。二维码352用于展示该家庭对应的二维码,用户可以将该二维码展示给其他用户或者将该二维码发送给其他用户,以供其他用户加入家庭。As shown in FIG. 6E , the user interface 35 may include a return control 351 and a two-dimensional code 352 . Wherein, the return control 351 can be used to exit the user interface 35 and return to the previous page (such as the user interface 34). The two-dimensional code 352 is used to display the two-dimensional code corresponding to the family, and the user can show the two-dimensional code to other users or send the two-dimensional code to other users for other users to join the family.

另外,电子设备100还可以检测到用户作用于图6D中的昵称343C的触控操作,响应于该操作,显示如图6F所示的用户界面36。该用户界面36用于修改用户在家庭中的昵称。In addition, the electronic device 100 may also detect the user's touch operation on the nickname 343C in FIG. 6D , and in response to the operation, display the user interface 36 as shown in FIG. 6F . This user interface 36 is used to modify the user's nickname within the family.

如图6F所示,用户界面36可以包括:返回控件361、信息输入窗口362。其中,返回控件361可用于退出用户界面36,返回到上一级页面(例如用户界面34)。信息输入窗口362可用于输入用户在该家庭中的昵称。示例性地,用户可以根据自己在家庭中担任的角色来填写该名称,例如,“爸爸”,“妈妈”,“儿子”,“女儿”等等。如图6F所示,用户可以在信息输入窗口362中输入“爸爸”作为用户在该家庭中的昵称。As shown in FIG. 6F , the user interface 36 may include: a return control 361 and an information input window 362 . Wherein, the return control 361 can be used to exit the user interface 36 and return to the previous page (such as the user interface 34 ). Information entry window 362 may be used to enter the user's nickname within the household. Exemplarily, the user can fill in the name according to the role he plays in the family, for example, "father", "mother", "son", "daughter" and so on. As shown in FIG. 6F , the user may input "Dad" in the information input window 362 as the user's nickname in the family.

图6G示出了展示家庭信息的用户界面37,用户可以通过该界面修改家庭的相关信息,例如,邀请或移除家庭成员,设置家庭名称、用户在家庭中的昵称、是否显示群成员昵称,解散家庭等等。Figure 6G shows a user interface 37 showing family information, through which the user can modify family-related information, for example, invite or remove family members, set the family name, user's nickname in the family, whether to display group member nicknames, Break up the family and so on.

如图6G所示,用户界面37可以包括:返回控件371、家庭成员列表372、信息展示窗口373。其中,返回控件371可用于退出用户界面37,返回上一级页面或分布式日程应用的主页面。家庭成员列表372家庭成员列表342可用于展示该家庭中包含的家庭成员。家庭成员列表372可包括第一成员图标372A、第二成员图标372B、第三成员图标372C、邀请图标372D、移除图标372E。其中,第一成员图标372A、第二成员图标372B以及第三成员图标372C分别表示该家庭中的三个家庭成员。邀请图标372D可用于邀请其他用户进入该家庭。 移除图标372E可用于移除该家庭中的用户。信息展示窗口373可用于展示家庭的相关信息。其中,信息展示窗口373可包括:家庭名称373A、家庭二维码373B、昵称373C、昵称显示开关373D以及解散家庭控件373E。家庭名称373A用于显示和设置该家庭的名称,家庭二维码373B用于触发显示该家庭的二维码,昵称373C可用于显示和设置用户在该家庭中的昵称,昵称显示开关373D用于设置是否显示家庭成员在该家庭中设置的昵称,解散家庭控件373E可用于触发解散该家庭。As shown in FIG. 6G , the user interface 37 may include: a return control 371 , a list of family members 372 , and an information display window 373 . Wherein, the return control 371 can be used to exit the user interface 37 and return to the upper level page or the main page of the distributed schedule application. Family member list 372 The family member list 342 can be used to display the family members included in the family. The family member list 372 may include a first member icon 372A, a second member icon 372B, a third member icon 372C, an invite icon 372D, and a remove icon 372E. Wherein, the first member icon 372A, the second member icon 372B and the third member icon 372C represent three family members in the family respectively. Invitation icon 372D may be used to invite other users into the home. Remove icon 372E may be used to remove a user from the household. The information display window 373 can be used to display relevant information of the family. Wherein, the information display window 373 may include: a family name 373A, a family QR code 373B, a nickname 373C, a nickname display switch 373D, and a disbanding family control 373E. The family name 373A is used to display and set the name of the family, the family QR code 373B is used to trigger the display of the family’s QR code, the nickname 373C can be used to display and set the user’s nickname in the family, and the nickname display switch 373D is used to Set whether to display the nicknames set by family members in the family, and the disbanding family control 373E can be used to trigger disbanding the family.

当电子设备100检测到用户作用于图6G中的移除图标372E的触控操作,响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示如图6H所示的用户界面37。When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the remove icon 372E in FIG. 6G , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display the user interface 37 as shown in FIG. 6H .

如图6H所示,第二成员图标372B中新增删除图标3721B,第三成员图标372C中新增图标3721C。删除图标3721B或删除图标3721C可以检测到用户的触控操作,响应于该操作,将第二成员图标372B对应的用户,或第三成员图标372C对应的用户从该家庭中移除。As shown in FIG. 6H , a delete icon 3721B is added to the second member icon 372B, and an icon 3721C is added to the third member icon 372C. The delete icon 3721B or the delete icon 3721C may detect a user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, the user corresponding to the second member icon 372B or the user corresponding to the third member icon 372C is removed from the family.

可以看出,图6A-图6H示出了用户在完成账号的创建后,通过分布式日程应用创建和管理家庭的过程,用户可以在家庭创建完成后邀请其他家庭成员进入该家庭,或者接受其他用户的邀请进入其他家庭。其中,一个家庭可以包含多个家庭成员,一个家庭成员可以进入多个家庭。这样,用户可以以群组的方式集中管理多个家庭成员的日程活动,为用户提供日程活动的便捷管理服务。It can be seen that Figures 6A-6H show the process of creating and managing a family through the distributed calendar application after the user has created the account. The user can invite other family members to enter the family after the family is created, or accept other family members. User's invitation to enter other families. Among them, a family can contain multiple family members, and a family member can enter multiple families. In this way, the user can centrally manage the schedule activities of multiple family members in a group manner, providing the user with a convenient management service of schedule activities.

图7A-图7J示例性示出了添加和管理设备涉及到的一些用户界面。7A-7J illustrate some user interfaces involved in adding and managing devices.

如图7A所示,用户界面41可包括:菜单栏211、更多选项411、设备展示区域412。其中,菜单栏211可包括:主页选项211A、日程选项211B、我的选项211C这三个选项。具体关于菜单栏211的描述可以参见前述图5A中的相关内容,这里不再赘述。从图7A所示看出,主页选项211A处于选中状态,用户界面41用于展示主页选项211A对应的子页面。用户界面41中的更多选项411可用于触发显示更多的设置选项,设备展示区域412可用于显示电子设备100建立过通信连接的工作设备,另外,设备展示区域412可以按照设备属性对工作设备进行分类排列,如图7A示出了电子设备100添加的两个属于随身设备的手表和手机。当电子设备100检测用户作用于更多控件411的触控操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备100可以在用户界面41中显示如图7B所示的设置窗口413。As shown in FIG. 7A , the user interface 41 may include: a menu bar 211 , more options 411 , and a device display area 412 . Wherein, the menu bar 211 may include three options: a home page option 211A, a schedule option 211B, and a my option 211C. For a specific description of the menu bar 211, reference may be made to the relevant content in the foregoing FIG. 5A, and details are not repeated here. It can be seen from FIG. 7A that the homepage option 211A is selected, and the user interface 41 is used to display the subpage corresponding to the homepage option 211A. The more options 411 in the user interface 41 can be used to trigger the display of more setting options, and the device display area 412 can be used to display the working devices with which the electronic device 100 has established a communication connection. Classify and arrange, as shown in FIG. 7A , two wristwatches and mobile phones added by the electronic device 100 are portable devices. When the electronic device 100 detects a user's touch operation on the more control 411 , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display a setting window 413 in the user interface 41 as shown in FIG. 7B .

如图7B所示,设置窗口413可包括:添加设备选项413A、创建场景选项413B、扫一扫选项413C。其中,添加设备选项413A可用于与工作设备建立通信连接,将工作设备添加到设备展示区域412中,创建场景选项413B可用于触发创建生活场景,用户可以在不同的生活场景下创建多个日程活动,帮助用户对日程活动进行更好的分类,例如,生活场景可以包括:顾家场景、宠物场景、老人场景,其中,顾家场景用于用户设置一些贴近生活家常活动,例如,三餐、工作日程、清洁、出行等活动,宠物场景用于用户设置一些照顾宠物相关的活动,例如,清洁、投喂、遛宠物提醒、添水等活动,老人场景用于用户设置一些照顾老人相关的活动,例如,吃药提醒、营养餐、锻炼、午休等活动。扫一扫选项413C用于触发扫码。As shown in FIG. 7B , the setting window 413 may include: an add device option 413A, a scene creation option 413B, and a scan option 413C. Among them, the add equipment option 413A can be used to establish a communication connection with the work equipment, add the work equipment to the equipment display area 412, and the create scene option 413B can be used to trigger the creation of life scenes, and the user can create multiple schedule activities in different life scenes , to help users better classify their schedule activities. For example, life scenes can include: home care scenes, pet scenes, and elderly scenes. Among them, home care scenes are used for users to set up some daily activities that are close to life, such as three meals, work schedules, Cleaning, travel and other activities. The pet scene is used for users to set some activities related to taking care of pets, such as cleaning, feeding, pet walking reminders, adding water and other activities. The elderly scene is used for users to set some activities related to caring for the elderly, such as eating Medication reminder, nutritious meal, exercise, lunch break and other activities. The scan option 413C is used to trigger code scanning.

可选地,电子设备100可以在添加设备时,根据用户的选择确定添加的设备的设备属性。之后,再将添加的设备按照设备属性排列在设备展示区域412中。也就是说,在电子设备100确定需要添加的设备后,可以提供多个设备属性的选项,以供用户确定该设备的设备属性。Optionally, when adding a device, the electronic device 100 may determine the device attribute of the added device according to the user's selection. Afterwards, the added devices are arranged in the device display area 412 according to the device attributes. That is to say, after the electronic device 100 determines the device that needs to be added, multiple device attribute options may be provided for the user to determine the device attribute of the device.

可选地,电子设备100也可以在添加设备时,自动根据设备的类型确定设备的设备属性。例如,当电子设备100确定添加的设备为耳机时,电子设备100可以自动将该设备归类为随身设备。Optionally, when adding a device, the electronic device 100 may automatically determine the device attribute of the device according to the type of the device. For example, when the electronic device 100 determines that the added device is an earphone, the electronic device 100 may automatically classify the device as a portable device.

可选地,电子设备100在与工作设备建立通信连接时,工作设备可以向电子设备100发送包含设备属性的指示信息,电子设备100可以根据该指示信息确定电子设备100添加的设备的设备属性。Optionally, when the electronic device 100 establishes a communication connection with the working device, the working device may send indication information including device attributes to the electronic device 100, and the electronic device 100 may determine the device attribute of the device added by the electronic device 100 according to the indication information.

另外,在电子设备100确定添加的设备的设备属性后,电子设备100可以接收到用户修改设备属性的操作,更改设备的设备属性。In addition, after the electronic device 100 determines the device attribute of the added device, the electronic device 100 may receive an operation of modifying the device attribute by the user, and change the device attribute of the device.

图7C示例性示出了电子设备100添加设备后,更新后的用户界面41。如图7C所示,设备展示区域412新增家务设备和娱乐设备,其中家务设备包括扫地机器人和智能台灯。其中,设备展示区域412可包括:第一设备选项412A、第二设备选项412B。第一设备选项412A对应家务设备中的扫地机器人,第二设备选项412B对应家务设备中的智能台灯。该第一设备选项412A可用于触发设置扫地机器人的相关配置。具体地,第一设备选项412A可检测到用户的触控操作(例如长按操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100在第一设备选项412A所在区域新增如图7D所示的设置窗口412C。FIG. 7C exemplarily shows the updated user interface 41 after the electronic device 100 adds a device. As shown in FIG. 7C , housework equipment and entertainment equipment are newly added in the equipment display area 412 , where the household equipment includes a sweeping robot and a smart desk lamp. Wherein, the device display area 412 may include: a first device option 412A and a second device option 412B. The first equipment option 412A corresponds to the cleaning robot in the household equipment, and the second equipment option 412B corresponds to the smart desk lamp in the household equipment. The first device option 412A can be used to trigger setting related configurations of the cleaning robot. Specifically, the first device option 412A can detect a user's touch operation (such as a long press operation), and in response to this operation, the electronic device 100 adds a setting window 412C as shown in FIG. 7D in the area where the first device option 412A is located. .

如图7D所示,设置窗口412C可包括:编辑名称选项4121C、共享设备选项4122C、删除设备选项4123C选项。其中,编辑名称选项4121C可用于触发修改设备的名称。共享设备选项4122C可用于触发与其他用户共享该设备,以供其他用户能够拥有配置和控制该设备的权限。删除设备4123C可用于触发删除该设备,将该设备从设备展示区域412中移除。As shown in FIG. 7D , the setting window 412C may include: an edit name option 4121C, a share device option 4122C, and a delete device option 4123C options. Wherein, the edit name option 4121C can be used to trigger modification of the name of the device. Share device option 4122C may be used to trigger sharing of the device with other users for the other users to have access to configure and control the device. The delete device 4123C can be used to trigger the deletion of the device, and remove the device from the device display area 412 .

其中,电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于图7D所示的编辑名称选项4121C的触控操作,响应于该操作,电子设备100显示如图7E所示的用户界面42,该用户界面42用于更改设备的名称。Wherein, the electronic device 100 can detect the user's touch operation on the edit name option 4121C shown in FIG. 7D, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 42 shown in FIG. Change the name of the device.

如图7E所示,用户界面42可包括:返回控件421、信息输入窗口422。其中,返回控件421可用于退出用户界面42,返回到上一级用户界面(例如用户界面41)。信息输入窗口422可用于输入设备的名称,例如“老公的扫地机器人”,在电子设备100检测到作用于返回控件421的触控操作后,电子设备100将信息输入窗口422中输入的文字作为更改后的设备的名称,并显示在用户界面41中设备展示区域412中的相关设备上。As shown in FIG. 7E , the user interface 42 may include: a return control 421 and an information input window 422 . Wherein, the return control 421 can be used to exit the user interface 42 and return to the upper level user interface (such as the user interface 41 ). The information input window 422 can be used to input the name of the device, such as "husband's sweeping robot". After the electronic device 100 detects the touch operation acting on the return control 421, the electronic device 100 uses the text entered in the information input window 422 as a modification. The name of the subsequent device is displayed on the relevant device in the device display area 412 of the user interface 41.

另外,电子设备100还可以检测到用户作用于图7D所示的共享设备选项4122C的触控操作,响应于该操作,电子设备100显示如图7F或图7H或图7I所示的用户界面43,该用户界面43用于设置与家庭成员共享该设备。In addition, the electronic device 100 can also detect the user's touch operation on the shared device option 4122C shown in FIG. 7D, and in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 43 as shown in FIG. 7F or 7H or 7I. , the user interface 43 is used to set the device to be shared with family members.

如图7F所示,用户界面43可包括:返回控件431、家庭选项432、确认控件433。其中,返回控件431可用于退出用户界面43,返回到上一级用户界面(例如用户界面41)。家庭选项432可用于从家庭中选择家庭成员共享该设备。确认控件433可用于确定根据用户在家庭选项432中的配置设置设备的共享成员。家庭选项432可包括:家庭名称432A、选择选项432B。家庭名称432A用于显示家庭的名称,家庭名称432A可以检测到用户的触控操作,响应于该操作,展开该家庭中包含的家庭成员。选择选项432B可用于选择该家庭中的所有家庭成员共享该设备。当电子设备100检测到用户作用于家庭名称432A的触控操作时,展开该家庭中包含的所有家庭成员,家庭选项432更新为如图7G所示的用户界面43中的家庭选项432。As shown in FIG. 7F , the user interface 43 may include: a return control 431 , a home option 432 , and a confirmation control 433 . Wherein, the return control 431 can be used to exit the user interface 43 and return to the upper-level user interface (such as the user interface 41 ). Family option 432 may be used to select family members from within the family to share the device. Confirmation control 433 may be used to determine the sharing members of the device according to the user's configuration settings in family options 432 . Family options 432 may include: family name 432A, selection option 432B. The family name 432A is used to display the name of the family. The family name 432A can detect a user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, expand the family members included in the family. Selecting option 432B may be used to select all family members in the household to share the device. When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the family name 432A, it expands all family members included in the family, and the family option 432 is updated as the family option 432 in the user interface 43 as shown in FIG. 7G .

如图7G所示,家庭选项432还包括:第一家庭成员432C、第二家庭成员432D、第三家庭成员432E。其中,第一家庭成员432C、第二家庭成员432D以及第三家庭成员432E分别对应该家庭中包含的家庭成员,第一家庭成员432C包括开关4321C,第二家庭成员432D包括开关4321D,第三家庭成员432E包括开关4321E。开关4321C、开关4321D以及开关4321E可以分别检测到用户的触控操作,开启或关闭其对应的家庭成员对该设备的共享。图7G示 例性示出了开关4321C和开关4321D处于开启状态,开关4321E处于关闭状态,在电子设备100检测到用户作用于确认控件433的触控操作后,响应于该操作,电子设备100可以将该设备(即扫地机器人)共享给昵称为“爸爸”和“妈妈”的家庭成员。As shown in FIG. 7G , the family option 432 further includes: a first family member 432C, a second family member 432D, and a third family member 432E. Among them, the first family member 432C, the second family member 432D and the third family member 432E respectively correspond to the family members included in the family, the first family member 432C includes a switch 4321C, the second family member 432D includes a switch 4321D, and the third family member Member 432E includes switch 4321E. The switch 4321C, the switch 4321D, and the switch 4321E can respectively detect the touch operation of the user, and enable or disable the sharing of the device by their corresponding family members. FIG. 7G exemplarily shows that the switch 4321C and the switch 4321D are in the on state, and the switch 4321E is in the off state. After the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the confirmation control 433, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can set the The device (i.e. the robot vacuum) is shared with family members nicknamed "Dad" and "Mom".

如图7H所示,用户界面43可包括:返回控件434、搜索窗口435、确定控件436。其中,返回控件434可用于退出用户界面43,返回到上一级用户界面(例如用户界面41)。搜索窗口435可用于根据手机号搜素用户并共享设备给该用户,确定控件436可用于确定根据用户搜索到的用户设置设备共享的成员。As shown in FIG. 7H , the user interface 43 may include: a return control 434 , a search window 435 , and a determination control 436 . Wherein, the return control 434 can be used to exit the user interface 43 and return to the upper level user interface (such as the user interface 41 ). The search window 435 can be used to search for a user according to the mobile phone number and share the device with the user, and the determination control 436 can be used to determine the member who sets the device sharing according to the user searched by the user.

如图7I所示,用户界面43可包括:返回控件437、全选选项438、成员列表439。其中,返回控件437可用于退出用户界面43,返回到上一级用户界面(例如用户界面41)。全选选项438可用于勾选成员列表439中列举的所有成员,成员列表439中可以列举用户加入的所有家庭中的家庭成员,或者,用户的所有通信联系人等等,用户可以在成员列表439中选择共享的成员。As shown in FIG. 7I , the user interface 43 may include: a return control 437 , a select all option 438 , and a member list 439 . Wherein, the return control 437 can be used to exit the user interface 43 and return to the upper level user interface (such as the user interface 41 ). Select all option 438 can be used to check all members enumerated in member list 439, can enumerate the family members in all families that user joins in member list 439, perhaps, all communication contacts of user etc., user can be listed in member list 439 Select the shared member.

另外,电子设备100还可以检测到用户作用于图7D中的删除设备4123C的触控操作,响应于该操作,在用户界面41中显示如图7J所示的提示窗口414,该提示窗口414用于提示用户是否删除该设备。In addition, the electronic device 100 can also detect the user's touch operation on the delete device 4123C in FIG. 7D , and in response to the operation, display a prompt window 414 as shown in FIG. to prompt the user whether to delete the device.

如图7J所示,提示窗口414可包括:取消选项414A、删除选项414B。其中,取消选项414A可用于取消删除设备,删除选项414B可用于确认删除设备。As shown in FIG. 7J , the prompt window 414 may include: a cancel option 414A and a delete option 414B. Among them, the cancel option 414A can be used to cancel the deletion of the device, and the delete option 414B can be used to confirm the deletion of the device.

可以看出,图7A-图7J示出了用户添加和管理设备的一些基础设置相关的用户界面,用户可以通过添加工作设备来实现对工作设备的管控,将工作设备分享给家庭成员,可以实现其他用户对工作设备的管控。这样,在电子设备100调整好日程活动后,电子设备100可以直接管控这些工作设备的工作状态,以便工作设备为用户提供针对性的服务。It can be seen that Fig. 7A-Fig. 7J show the user interfaces related to some basic settings of user adding and managing devices. Users can add work devices to manage and control work devices, and share work devices with family members. Management and control of work equipment by other users. In this way, after the electronic device 100 has adjusted the schedule activities, the electronic device 100 can directly control the working status of these working devices, so that the working devices can provide users with targeted services.

图8A-图8B示例性示出了对设备进行高级配置涉及到的一些用户界面。8A-8B exemplarily show some user interfaces involved in advanced configuration of the device.

在电子设备100完成设备的添加之后,电子设备100还可以实现对设备的一些高级配置,高级配置包括对设备的工作参数的设置。After the electronic device 100 completes adding devices, the electronic device 100 may also implement some advanced configurations on the devices, and the advanced configurations include setting working parameters of the devices.

当电子设备100检测到用户作用于图7C所示的第一设备选项412A的触控操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100显示如图8A所示的用户界面51,该用户界面51用于显示第一设备选项412A对应的设备的工作参数。When the electronic device 100 detects a touch operation (such as a click operation) performed by the user on the first device option 412A shown in FIG. 7C, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 51 as shown in FIG. 8A. The interface 51 is used to display the working parameters of the equipment corresponding to the first equipment option 412A.

如图8A所示,用户界面51可包括:取消控件511、确认控件512、参数设置区域513。其中,取消控件511可用于取消设置设备的工作参数,返回上一级用户界面(例如用户界面41)。确认控件512可用于根据参数设置区域513中配置的参数,确认设置设备的工作参数。参数设置区域513中可包含设备的多个设置选项、设备的状态参数以及设备的服务等等,例如,电量、工作开关、工作模式、定时选项、工作范围选项等等,图8A中示例性示出了扫地机器人的工作参数,包括工作开关、剩余电量、水箱剩余、工作模式、是否消毒选项、定时选项、工作范围选项、设备服务等等。As shown in FIG. 8A , the user interface 51 may include: a cancel control 511 , a confirmation control 512 , and a parameter setting area 513 . Wherein, the cancel control 511 can be used to cancel setting the working parameters of the device, and return to the user interface of the upper level (such as the user interface 41 ). The confirmation control 512 can be used to confirm the setting of the working parameters of the device according to the parameters configured in the parameter setting area 513 . The parameter setting area 513 may contain multiple setting options of the device, status parameters of the device, services of the device, etc., for example, power, working switch, working mode, timing options, working range options, etc., which are exemplarily shown in FIG. 8A The working parameters of the sweeping robot are listed, including working switch, remaining power, water tank remaining, working mode, disinfection option, timing option, working range option, equipment service and so on.

当电子设备100检测到用户作用于图7C所示的第二设备选项412B的触控操作(例如点击操作),响应于该操作,电子设备100显示如图8B所示的用户界面52,该用户界面52用于显示第二设备选项412B对应的设备的工作参数。When the electronic device 100 detects a touch operation (such as a click operation) performed by the user on the second device option 412B shown in FIG. 7C , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 52 as shown in FIG. 8B . The interface 52 is used to display the working parameters of the device corresponding to the second device option 412B.

如图8B所示,用户界面52可包括:取消控件521、确认控件522、参数设置区域523。其中,取消控件521可用于取消设置设备的工作参数,返回上一级用户界面(例如用户界面41)。确认控件522可用于根据参数设置区域523中配置的参数,确认设置设备的工作参数。 参数设置区域523中可包含设备的多个设置选项、设备的状态参数以及设备的服务等等。图8B中示例性示出了智能台灯的工作参数,包括工作开关、工作模式、色温选项、亮度选项、定时选项、预约选项、番茄钟选项等等。As shown in FIG. 8B , the user interface 52 may include: a cancel control 521 , a confirmation control 522 , and a parameter setting area 523 . Wherein, the cancel control 521 can be used to cancel setting of the working parameters of the device, and return to the upper user interface (such as the user interface 41 ). The confirmation control 522 can be used to confirm the setting of the working parameters of the device according to the parameters configured in the parameter setting area 523 . The parameter setting area 523 may include multiple setting options of the device, status parameters of the device, services of the device, and so on. Fig. 8B exemplarily shows the working parameters of the smart desk lamp, including working switch, working mode, color temperature option, brightness option, timing option, appointment option, Pomodoro option and so on.

可以理解的是,图8A、图8B是指示例性介绍了不同工作设备的高级配置相关的用户界面,不构成对工作设备的高级配置设置的工作参数的限制。It can be understood that FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B refer to user interfaces related to the advanced configuration of different working devices, and do not constitute restrictions on the working parameters set by the advanced configuration of the working devices.

可以看出,图8A-图8B示出了在电子设备100上,通过分布式日程应用设置工作设备的工作参数的过程,这样,用户可以通过手机、平板等设备,集中控制多个智能家电,为用户管理和配置家庭中的智能家电提供了便利。It can be seen that Figs. 8A-8B show the process of setting the working parameters of the working device through the distributed schedule application on the electronic device 100, so that the user can centrally control multiple smart home appliances through mobile phones, tablets and other devices, It provides convenience for users to manage and configure smart home appliances in the home.

图9A-图9E示例性示出了添加日程活动涉及到的一些用户界面。9A-9E exemplarily show some user interfaces involved in adding a calendar activity.

当电子设备100检测到用户作用于图7C所示的日程选项211B的触控操作,响应于该操作,电子设备100显示日程选项211B对应的页面,该页面用于添加和查看日程活动。图9A示例性示出了电子设备100显示日程选项211B对应的页面后,检测到用户添加日程活动的用户操作时,显示的用户界面61,该用户界面61用于添加日程活动。When the electronic device 100 detects a user's touch operation on the schedule option 211B shown in FIG. 7C , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays a page corresponding to the schedule option 211B, which is used to add and view schedule activities. FIG. 9A exemplarily shows a user interface 61 displayed when the user operation of adding a schedule activity is detected after the electronic device 100 displays a page corresponding to the schedule option 211B. The user interface 61 is used to add a schedule activity.

如图9A所示,用户界面61可包括:取消控件611、确认控件612、日程名称613、活动属性614、通知成员615、相关设备616、工作时间617、重复日期618。其中,取消控件611用于取消添加日程活动。确认控件612用于确认添加日程活动。日程名称613用于输入该日程活动的名称。活动属性614用于选择该日程活动所属的活动属性。通知成员615用于选择该日程活动需要通知的用户,该活动通知的成员即为该日程活动的执行对象。相关设备616用于设置该日程活动相关的工作设备,以供电子设备100执行该日程活动时,控制其相关的工作设备的工作状态,以便完成该日程活动。工作时间617用于设置该活动的持续时间,可包括开始时间和结束时间。重复日期618用于设置该日程活动的重复日期。As shown in FIG. 9A , the user interface 61 may include: a cancel control 611 , a confirmation control 612 , a schedule name 613 , an event attribute 614 , notify members 615 , related equipment 616 , work hours 617 , and repeat dates 618 . Wherein, the cancel control 611 is used for canceling adding the scheduled activity. The confirmation control 612 is used to confirm adding the schedule activity. The schedule name 613 is used to input the name of the schedule activity. The activity attribute 614 is used to select the activity attribute to which the scheduled activity belongs. The notification member 615 is used to select the user who needs to be notified of the scheduled activity, and the member notified of the activity is the execution object of the scheduled activity. The related equipment 616 is used to set the working equipment related to the schedule activity, so that when the electronic device 100 executes the schedule activity, it can control the working status of its related working equipment, so as to complete the schedule activity. Working time 617 is used to set the duration of the activity, which may include start time and end time. Repeat date 618 is used to set the repeat date of the schedule activity.

当电子设备100检测到用户作用于活动属性614的触控操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备100显示如图9B所示的用户界面62,该用户界面62用于设置该日程活动所属的活动属性。When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the activity attribute 614, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays a user interface 62 as shown in FIG. 9B, and the user interface 62 is used to set the activity to which the scheduled activity belongs Attributes.

如图9B所示,用户界面62可包括:返回控件621、选项窗口622、优先级窗口623。其中,返回控件621可用于退出用户界面62,返回上一级用户界面(例如用户界面61)。选项窗口622可包括活动属性选项栏622A以及自定义选项622B。其中,活动属性选项栏622A包含一个或多个预置的活动属性,例如:睡眠、学习、工作、娱乐、清洁等等,电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于这一个或多个活动属性的触控操作,设置该活动的活动属性。自定义选项622B用于用户新增自定义活动属性,自定义选项622B包括更多选项6221B,该更多选项6221B可以检测到用户的触控操作,响应于该操作,新增自定义活动属性,用户可以自行添加活动属性。优先级窗口623用于设置活动属性的优先级,该优先级用于指示日程活动执行的先后顺序。其中,电子设备100可以预置优先级,图9B中示例性示出了电子设备100预置的优先级可以为:睡眠、学习、工作、娱乐、清洁的优先级为由高到低。那么,当同一时间存在两个日程活动时,电子设备100可以按照这两个日程活动的优先级的大小,优先满足优先级高的日程活动的活动内容。另外,优先级窗口623可包括更多选项623A,该更多选项623A可以检测到用户的触控操作,响应于该操作,为用户提供自定义活动优先级的输入窗口。也即是说,用户可以自行更改活动的优先级,或将自定义的活动属性添加到该活动优先级的排序中。As shown in FIG. 9B , the user interface 62 may include: a return control 621 , an option window 622 , and a priority window 623 . Wherein, the return control 621 can be used to exit the user interface 62 and return to the upper level user interface (such as the user interface 61 ). Options window 622 may include activity properties options bar 622A and customization options 622B. Wherein, the activity attribute option column 622A contains one or more preset activity attributes, such as: sleep, study, work, entertainment, cleaning, etc., and the electronic device 100 can detect that the user acts on the one or more activity attributes. control operation, set the activity properties of the activity. The custom option 622B is used for the user to add a custom activity attribute. The custom option 622B includes more options 6221B. The more options 6221B can detect the user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, add a custom activity attribute. Users can add activity attributes by themselves. The priority window 623 is used to set the priority of the activity attribute, and the priority is used to indicate the order in which the scheduled activities are executed. Wherein, the electronic device 100 may preset priorities. FIG. 9B exemplarily shows that the preset priorities of the electronic device 100 may be: sleep, study, work, entertainment, and cleaning priorities from high to low. Then, when there are two calendar activities at the same time, the electronic device 100 may preferentially satisfy the activity content of the calendar activity with higher priority according to the priorities of the two calendar activities. In addition, the priority window 623 may include more options 623A, and the more options 623A may detect a user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, provide the user with an input window for customizing activity priorities. That is to say, the user can change the priority of the activity by himself, or add a self-defined activity attribute to the sorting of the priority of the activity.

另外,当电子设备100检测到用户作用于图9A中的通知成员615的触控操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示如图9C所示的用户界面63,该用户界面63用于设置该日 程活动需要通知的用户。In addition, when the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the notification member 615 in FIG. 9A, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display a user interface 63 as shown in FIG. Set the users who need to be notified about this schedule event.

如图9C所示,用户界面63可包括:返回控件631、家庭选项632。其中,返回控件631用于退出用户界面63,返回上一级用户界面(例如用户界面61)。家庭选项632用于显示该日程活动可通知的家庭,从图9C可以看出,当用户加入了一个家庭时,该家庭选项632可以显示用户加入的该家庭的名称。其中,家庭选项632可包括:家庭名称632A、选择选项632B。家庭名称632A用于显示家庭的名称,家庭名称632A可以检测到用户的触控操作,响应于该操作,展开该家庭中包含的家庭成员。选择选项632B可用于选择该家庭中的所有家庭成员作为该日程活动需通知的对象。当电子设备100检测到用户作用于家庭名称632A的触控操作时,展开该家庭中包含的所有家庭成员,家庭选项632更新为如图9D所示的用户界面63中的家庭选项632。As shown in FIG. 9C , the user interface 63 may include: a return control 631 and a home option 632 . Wherein, the return control 631 is used for exiting the user interface 63 and returning to a user interface of a higher level (such as the user interface 61 ). The family option 632 is used to display the family that can be notified of the schedule event. As can be seen from FIG. 9C , when the user joins a family, the family option 632 can display the name of the family that the user joins. Wherein, the family option 632 may include: family name 632A, selection option 632B. The family name 632A is used to display the name of the family. The family name 632A can detect a user's touch operation, and in response to the operation, expand the family members included in the family. Selection option 632B may be used to select all family members in the family to be notified about the calendar event. When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the family name 632A, all family members contained in the family are expanded, and the family option 632 is updated as the family option 632 in the user interface 63 as shown in FIG. 9D .

如图9D所示,家庭选项632还包括:第一家庭成员632C、第二家庭成员632D、第三家庭成员632E、确认控件633。其中,第一家庭成员632C、第二家庭成员632D以及第三家庭成员632E分别对应该家庭中包含的家庭成员,第一家庭成员632C包括开关6321C,第二家庭成员632D包括开关6321D,第三家庭成员632E包括开关6321E。开关6321C、开关6321D以及开关6321E可以分别检测到用户的触控操作,选中或取消选中其对应的家庭成员。当电子设备100检测到用户作用于确认控件633的触控操作时,电子设备100将选中的家庭成员作为该日程活动中需要通知的对象。As shown in FIG. 9D , the family option 632 further includes: a first family member 632C, a second family member 632D, a third family member 632E, and a confirmation control 633 . Among them, the first family member 632C, the second family member 632D and the third family member 632E respectively correspond to the family members included in the family, the first family member 632C includes a switch 6321C, the second family member 632D includes a switch 6321D, and the third family member Member 632E includes switch 6321E. The switch 6321C, the switch 6321D, and the switch 6321E can respectively detect the user's touch operation, and select or unselect the corresponding family member. When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the confirmation control 633 , the electronic device 100 takes the selected family member as the object to be notified in the schedule activity.

示例性地,在用户设置日程活动的过程中,如果电子设备100检测到用户输入的日程活动中,存在活动时间与家庭成员与另外的日程活动冲突时,在电子设备100接收到用户确认添加日程活动后,电子设备100可以显示提示信息,提示用户当前设置的日程活动与之前设置的日程活动用户,进一步地,电子设备100可以根据用户的操作更改日程活动的内容,这可以自动根据活动的优先级调整日程活动。Exemplarily, during the process of setting the schedule activity by the user, if the electronic device 100 detects that there is a conflict between the activity time and family members and another schedule activity in the schedule activity input by the user, the electronic device 100 receives the user confirmation to add the schedule activity. After the event, the electronic device 100 can display prompt information to remind the user that the currently set schedule activity is different from the previously set schedule activity user, and further, the electronic device 100 can change the content of the schedule activity according to the user's operation, which can automatically be based on the priority of the activity. Level adjustment schedule activities.

可选地,如果用户未加入任何家庭,当电子设备100检测到用户作用于图9A中的通知成员615的触控操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示如图9E所示的用户界面64。Optionally, if the user has not joined any family, when the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the notification member 615 in FIG. 9A, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can display the user's interface64.

如图9E所示,由于用户未加入任何家庭,用户界面64中显示提示信息,提示用户还没有加入家庭。其中,用户界面64中包括创建控件641,该创建控件641可用于触发创建家庭。示例性地,当电子设备100检测到用户作用于创建控件641的触控操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备100显示图6A所示的用户界面31。As shown in FIG. 9E , since the user has not joined any family, a prompt message is displayed on the user interface 64 to remind the user that the user has not yet joined a family. Wherein, the user interface 64 includes a creation control 641, which can be used to trigger the creation of a family. Exemplarily, when the electronic device 100 detects a user's touch operation on the creation control 641 , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the user interface 31 shown in FIG. 6A .

另外,当电子设备100检测到用户作用于图9A中的相关设备616的触控操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备100显示如图9F所示的用户界面65,该用户界面65用于设置该日程活动相关的工作设备。In addition, when the electronic device 100 detects a user's touch operation on the relevant device 616 in FIG. 9A, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays a user interface 65 as shown in FIG. Work equipment associated with this schedule activity.

如图9F所示,用户界面65可包括:返回控件651、确认控件652、设备展示区域653。返回控件651可用于退出用户界面65,返回上一级用户界面(例如用户界面61)。确认控件652可用于确认设置日程活动相关的工作设备。设备展示区域653可用于展示电子设备100建立过通信连接的设备,这些设备可以按照设备的设备属性进行排列。其中,设备展示区域653可以包括第一设备选项653A和第二设备选项653B。第一设备选项653A和第二设备选项653B可以分别对应电子设备100建立过通信连接的扫地机器人和智能台灯。第一设备选项653A可以包括开关6531A,第二设备选项653B可以包括开关6531B。开关6531A和开关6531B可以分别检测到用户的触控操作,选中或取消选中其对应的设备。当电子设备100检测到用户作用于确认控件652的触控操作时,电子设备100将选中的设备最为该日程活动相关的设备。As shown in FIG. 9F , the user interface 65 may include: a return control 651 , a confirmation control 652 , and a device display area 653 . The return control 651 can be used to exit the user interface 65 and return to the upper user interface (such as the user interface 61 ). The confirmation control 652 can be used to confirm the work equipment related to setting the schedule activity. The device display area 653 can be used to display devices with which the electronic device 100 has established communication connections, and these devices can be arranged according to device attributes of the devices. Wherein, the device display area 653 may include a first device option 653A and a second device option 653B. The first device option 653A and the second device option 653B may respectively correspond to the cleaning robot and the smart desk lamp with which the electronic device 100 has established a communication connection. The first device option 653A may include a switch 6531A and the second device option 653B may include a switch 6531B. The switch 6531A and the switch 6531B can respectively detect the user's touch operation, and select or unselect the corresponding device. When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the confirmation control 652, the electronic device 100 regards the selected device as the device related to the schedule activity.

另外,当电子设备100检测到用户作用于图9A中的重复日期618的触控操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备100显示如图9G所示的用户界面66,该用户界面66用于设置日程活动的重复日期。In addition, when the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the repeat date 618 in FIG. 9A, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays a user interface 66 as shown in FIG. The recurrence date for the calendar event.

如图9G所示,用户界面66可包括:返回控件661、日期选择区域662。其中,返回控件661用于退出用户界面66,日期选择区域662包含多个日期选项,这多个日期选项能够接收到用户的操作,响应于该操作,选中响应的日期作为该日程活动重复开展的日期。图9G中示例性示出了每周日和每周一处于选中状态,则该日程活动会在每周日和每周一重复开展。这样,对于每周需要重复执行的日程活动,用户无需重复设置该日程活动,只需在首次添加该日程活动时,设置该日程活动的重复日期即可,便捷用户的操作。As shown in FIG. 9G , the user interface 66 may include: a return control 661 and a date selection area 662 . Wherein, the return control 661 is used to exit the user interface 66, and the date selection area 662 includes a plurality of date options, and these multiple date options can receive the user's operation, and in response to the operation, the date of the selected response is used as the repeated launch of the schedule activity. date. FIG. 9G exemplarily shows that every Sunday and every Monday are selected, and the schedule activity will be repeated on every Sunday and every Monday. In this way, for a scheduled activity that needs to be repeated every week, the user does not need to repeatedly set the scheduled activity, but only needs to set the repeated date of the scheduled activity when adding the scheduled activity for the first time, which is convenient for the user to operate.

另外,在用户完成如图9A中所示的日程活动的信息设置后,当电子设备100接收到用户作用于图8A中的确认控件612的触控操作,响应于该操作,电子设备100可以完成该日程活动的添加。之后,电子设备100可以判断该日程活动与之前添加的日程活动是否存在冲突,当存在冲突时,电子设备100可以显示提示信息,提示用户更改,或者,电子设备100可以自行更改存在冲突的日程活动,例如,更改日程活动执行的时间,或者,调整该日程活动涉及的相关设备的配置信息等等,之后,电子设备100可以显示用户添加的所有日程活动,或显示调整后无冲突的所有日程活动。具体关于日程活动的显示可以参见下述图10A-图10B的内容,具体关于冲突的定义,以及冲突的调整可以参见后续方法实施例,这里先不赘述。In addition, after the user completes the information setting of the schedule activity as shown in FIG. 9A , when the electronic device 100 receives the user’s touch operation on the confirmation control 612 in FIG. 8A , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 can complete Addition of this calendar event. Afterwards, the electronic device 100 can determine whether there is a conflict between the scheduled event and the previously added scheduled event, and when there is a conflict, the electronic device 100 can display a prompt message to prompt the user to change, or the electronic device 100 can change the conflicting scheduled event by itself , for example, change the execution time of the scheduled activity, or adjust the configuration information of related devices involved in the scheduled activity, etc. After that, the electronic device 100 can display all scheduled activities added by the user, or display all scheduled activities without conflicts after adjustment . For details about the display of schedule activities, please refer to the content in FIG. 10A-10B below. For details about the definition of conflicts and the adjustment of conflicts, please refer to the subsequent method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.

可以看出,图9A-图9G示出了在电子设备100上,通过分布式日程应用添加日程活动的相关用户界面。也即是说,可以通过用户主动添加日程活动来提升电子设备100判断用户的生活状态的准确性,并且通过设置活动优先级的方式来为存在冲突的日程活动提供解决冲突的方式,使优先级高的日程活动能够优先执行,提升用户的体验感。It can be seen that FIG. 9A-FIG. 9G show related user interfaces for adding a calendar activity through a distributed calendar application on the electronic device 100 . That is to say, the accuracy of the electronic device 100 in judging the user's life status can be improved through the user's active addition of schedule activities, and a conflict resolution method can be provided for conflicting schedule activities by setting activity priorities, so that the priorities High-scheduled activities can be executed first to enhance the user experience.

图10A-图10B示例性示出了查看和管理日程活动涉及到的一些用户界面。10A-10B exemplarily show some user interfaces involved in viewing and managing calendar activities.

当电子设备100检测到用户作用于图7C所示的日程选项211B的触控操作,响应于该操作,电子设备100显示日程选项211B对应的页面,即图10A所示的用户界面71,该用户界面71用于添加、查看和管理日程活动。When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the schedule option 211B shown in FIG. 7C , in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays the page corresponding to the schedule option 211B, that is, the user interface 71 shown in FIG. 10A , the user Interface 71 is used to add, view and manage calendar activities.

如图10A所示,用户界面71可包括:生活场景控件711、查看控件712、添加控件713、活动列表714。其中,生活场景控件711用于切换不同生活场景下的日程活动,用户可以根据需求自行添加多个生活场景,并在不用生活场景下设置相关日程活动,例如,生活场景可以包括顾家场景、宠物场景、老人场景。具体关于生活场景的描述可以参见前述内容,这里不再赘述。查看控件712可用于查找日程活动,添加控件713可用于在当前选中的生活场景下添加日程活动。当电子设备100检测到用户作用于添加控件713的触控操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备100可以显示如图9A所示的用户界面61,该用户界面61用于添加日程活动。活动列表714用于列举用户添加的日程活动,该用户可以是指电子设备100上创建的家庭账号所在的用户,也可以是指同一个家庭中其他的家庭成员。或者,进一步地,活动列表714还可以列举有电子设备100主动添加的日程活动,具体地,电子设备100可以通过AI识别技术,通过获取电子设备100采集的信息或与电子设备100建立通信连接的其他设备采集的信息,获得的日程活动。例如,电子设备100获取到用户通过学习类应用,在9:00-10:00预约了一个网络课程,则电子设备100可以自动在该活动列表714中添加一个日程活动,并根据电子设备100采集到的信息确定该日程活动的活动时间为9:00-10:00,活动属性为学习等等。As shown in FIG. 10A , the user interface 71 may include: a life scene control 711 , a viewing control 712 , an adding control 713 , and an activity list 714 . Among them, the life scene control 711 is used to switch schedule activities in different life scenes. Users can add multiple life scenes according to their needs, and set related schedule activities in different life scenes. For example, life scenes can include home care scenes and pet scenes. , Old man scene. For specific descriptions of life scenarios, refer to the foregoing, and will not be repeated here. The view control 712 can be used to find a schedule activity, and the add control 713 can be used to add a schedule activity in the currently selected life scene. When the electronic device 100 detects a user's touch operation on the add control 713, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 may display a user interface 61 as shown in FIG. 9A, and the user interface 61 is used for adding a schedule activity. The activity list 714 is used to enumerate the schedule activities added by the user. The user may refer to the user whose family account is created on the electronic device 100 , or may refer to other family members in the same family. Or, further, the activity list 714 may also list the scheduled activities actively added by the electronic device 100. Specifically, the electronic device 100 may use AI recognition technology, obtain information collected by the electronic device 100 or establish a communication connection with the electronic device 100. Information collected by other devices and schedule activities obtained. For example, when the electronic device 100 acquires that the user has booked an online course at 9:00-10:00 through a learning application, the electronic device 100 can automatically add a schedule event to the activity list 714, and the electronic device 100 can collect The received information determines that the activity time of the schedule activity is 9:00-10:00, and the activity attribute is learning and so on.

这里,为了便于理解本申请实施例提供的活动管理方法,下面以一个具体的例子,结合 图10A来描述本方案。Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application, a specific example is used below to describe this solution in conjunction with FIG. 10A .

假设存在四个日程活动:早餐、打扫卫生、做作业、午餐。其中,早餐的安排时间为8:30-9:00,打扫卫生的安排时间为9:00-10:00,做作业的安排时间为9:30-10:30,午餐的安排时间为12:00-12:30,早餐需要打开面包机、电饭煲,打扫卫生需要打开扫地机、做作业需要关闭扫地机、打开智能台灯、午餐需要打开抽油烟机和电饭煲。这其中存在两个有冲突的日程活动:打扫卫生和做作业,因为打扫卫生需要打开扫地机而做作业需要关闭扫地机,当通过活动优先级进行排序,做作业的优先级高于打扫卫生,则做作业对应的日程活动优先执行,打扫卫生与做作业存在冲突的时间不执行打扫卫生的日程活动,并将打扫卫生的活动往后延迟。则更改后打扫卫生的日程活动拆分成了两个时间段进行,一个是在9:00-9:30,一个是在10:30-11:00。那么此时,参见图10A,活动列表714中可包括五个日程活动对应的选项:第一活动选项714A、第二活动选项714B、第三活动选项714C、第四活动选项714D以及第五活动选项714E。且这五个选项分别对应五个日程活动,这五个选项中显示有活动的状态、持续时间、活动名称、活动的添加者、相关设备等等。其中,第二活动选项714B中包含的状态图标7141B以及第三活动选项714C中包含的状态图标7141C用于表示活动执行的状态。图标7141B用于表示日程活动正常执行,状态图标7141C用于表示日程活动存在异常状态,无法正常执行。当电子设备100检测到用户作用于第三活动选项714C的触控操作时,响应于该操作,电子设备100在用户界面71中显示如图10B所示的提示信息715,该提示信息715用于指示用户该日程活动存在异常状态的具体原因。Suppose there are four schedule activities: breakfast, cleaning, homework, lunch. Among them, the arrangement time for breakfast is 8:30-9:00, the arrangement time for cleaning is 9:00-10:00, the arrangement time for homework is 9:30-10:30, and the arrangement time for lunch is 12:00 From 00 to 12:30, you need to turn on the bread machine and rice cooker for breakfast, turn on the sweeper for cleaning, turn off the sweeper for homework, turn on the smart desk lamp, and turn on the range hood and rice cooker for lunch. There are two conflicting schedule activities: cleaning and homework. Because cleaning needs to turn on the sweeper and doing homework needs to turn off the sweeper, when sorted by activity priority, the priority of doing homework is higher than that of cleaning. The schedule activities corresponding to the homework are executed first, and the cleaning schedule activities are not executed when there is a conflict between cleaning and homework, and the cleaning activities will be postponed later. After the change, the cleaning schedule is split into two time slots, one at 9:00-9:30 and one at 10:30-11:00. Then, referring to FIG. 10A, the activity list 714 may include options corresponding to five schedule activities: the first activity option 714A, the second activity option 714B, the third activity option 714C, the fourth activity option 714D and the fifth activity option 714E. And these five options correspond to five schedule activities respectively, and these five options display the state of the activity, the duration, the name of the activity, the adder of the activity, related equipment and so on. Wherein, the status icon 7141B included in the second activity option 714B and the status icon 7141C included in the third activity option 714C are used to indicate the status of the activity execution. The icon 7141B is used to indicate that the scheduled activity is executed normally, and the status icon 7141C is used to indicate that the scheduled activity is abnormal and cannot be executed normally. When the electronic device 100 detects the user's touch operation on the third activity option 714C, in response to the operation, the electronic device 100 displays a prompt message 715 as shown in FIG. 10B on the user interface 71. The prompt message 715 is used to Indicates to the user the specific reason for the unusual status of this calendar event.

如图10B所示,提示信息715用于提示用户,该日程活动存在异常的原因是因为执行对象不在指定范围,例如做作业的小朋友未在书房内。这时,电子设备100可以通过显示提示信息,提示用户维护日程活动的正常执行,帮助用户更好地了解家庭情况。As shown in FIG. 10B , the prompt information 715 is used to prompt the user that the reason for the abnormality of the scheduled activity is that the execution object is not within the specified range, for example, the child doing homework is not in the study. At this time, the electronic device 100 may display prompt information to prompt the user to maintain the normal execution of the schedule activities, thereby helping the user to better understand the family situation.

可以看出,图10A-图10B示出了在电子设备100上,通过分布式日程应用查看和管理日程活动的相关用户界面。分布式日程应用可以自动优化存在冲突的日程活动,为用户提供最优的生活服务,用户只需通过手机、平板等终端设备即可快速轻松了解到家庭中安排的各活动的执行情况,便捷了用户的操作,提升了用户的体验感。It can be seen that FIGS. 10A-10B show related user interfaces for viewing and managing calendar activities through the distributed calendar application on the electronic device 100 . The distributed schedule application can automatically optimize conflicting schedule activities to provide users with the best life services. Users can quickly and easily understand the execution of various activities arranged in the family through mobile phones, tablets and other terminal devices, which is convenient. The user's operation improves the user's experience.

需要注意的是,上述图5A-图5D、图6A-图6H、图7A-图7J、图8A-图8B、图9A-图9G、图10A-图10B只是示例性介绍,不构成对本申请的限制。It should be noted that the above-mentioned Figures 5A-5D, 6A-6H, 7A-7J, 8A-8B, 9A-9G, and 10A-10B are only exemplary introductions and do not constitute a reference to this application. limits.

图11示出了本申请实施例提供的活动管理方法的流程示意图。Fig. 11 shows a schematic flowchart of the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application.

如图11所示,该方法包括:As shown in Figure 11, the method includes:

S101.电子设备100获得日程活动,该日程活动包括:活动属性、活动优先级。S101. The electronic device 100 obtains a schedule activity, where the schedule activity includes: activity attribute and activity priority.

日程活动可以是指用户安排的日程活动。其中,电子设备100获取日程活动的方式可以包括但不限于以下几种:A schedule activity may refer to a schedule activity arranged by a user. Wherein, the ways for the electronic device 100 to obtain the schedule activities may include but not limited to the following:

(1)电子设备100接收到用户输入的日程活动(1) The electronic device 100 receives the schedule activity input by the user

也即是说,电子设备100可以通过用户输入日程活动的接口,接收用户在电子设备100上输入的日程活动。That is to say, the electronic device 100 may receive the schedule activity input by the user on the electronic device 100 through the interface for the user to input the schedule activity.

在本申请实施例中,电子设备100可以接收到用户通过分布式日程应用输入的日程活动。电子设备100可以显示分布式日程应用显示的用于添加日程活动的用户界面(例如用户界面61),并通过该用户界面获取用户输入的日程活动。In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 100 may receive a schedule activity input by a user through a distributed schedule application. The electronic device 100 may display a user interface (such as the user interface 61 ) displayed by the distributed calendar application for adding a schedule activity, and obtain the schedule activity input by the user through the user interface.

(2)电子设备100通过AI识别技术生成日程活动(2) Electronic device 100 generates schedule activities through AI recognition technology

也即是说,除了获取用户输入的日程活动,电子设备100也可以根据采集的信息自动生 成日程活动。具体地,电子设备100可以通过以下一种或多种方式生成日程活动:That is to say, in addition to obtaining the schedule activities input by the user, the electronic device 100 can also automatically generate schedule activities according to the collected information. Specifically, the electronic device 100 may generate a schedule event in one or more of the following ways:

1)电子设备100获取应用的信息来确定日程活动。电子设备100可以通过应用提供的接口,从一个或多个应用生成的信息中确定日程活动。例如,电子设备100可以通过学习类应用获取用户在某一时间预约的网络课程,从而生成一个在该时间的网课学习的日程活动。1) The electronic device 100 acquires application information to determine a schedule activity. The electronic device 100 may determine the schedule activity from information generated by one or more applications through an interface provided by the applications. For example, the electronic device 100 may obtain an online course reserved by a user at a certain time through a learning application, so as to generate a schedule activity of online course learning at that time.

2)电子设备100获取其他设备采集的信息来确定日程活动。电子设备100可以通过其他链接其他设备,获取其他设备采集的信息来确定日程活动。例如,电子设备100可以获取到用户在电饭煲设置的预约煮饭,从而生成一个烹饪饮食相关的日程活动。2) The electronic device 100 acquires information collected by other devices to determine the schedule activity. The electronic device 100 may link to other devices to obtain information collected by other devices to determine the schedule activity. For example, the electronic device 100 may obtain a cooking appointment set by the user in the rice cooker, so as to generate a schedule activity related to cooking and eating.

(3)电子设备100接收到其他设备发送的日程活动(3) The electronic device 100 receives the schedule activities sent by other devices

也即是说,其他设备也可以按照电子设备100获得日程活动的方式,获得日程活动,之后,再将该日程活动发送给电子设备100。具体关于其他设备获得日程活动的方式可以参见电子设备100获得日程活动的相关内容。其中,其他设备上登录的用户和电子设备100上登录的用户可以同处于一个家庭群组中。这样,电子设备100和其他设备可以共享家庭中所有成员的日程活动。具体关于创建或加入家庭的内容可以参见图6A-图6H以及相关描述,这里不再赘述。That is to say, other devices can also obtain the calendar event according to the manner in which the electronic device 100 obtains the calendar event, and then send the calendar event to the electronic device 100 . For details about the manner in which other devices obtain calendar activities, please refer to related content of obtaining calendar activities by the electronic device 100 . Wherein, the user logged in on other devices and the user logged in on the electronic device 100 may be in the same family group. In this way, the electronic device 100 and other devices can share the schedule activities of all members in the family. For details about creating or joining a family, please refer to FIGS. 6A-6H and related descriptions, which will not be repeated here.

可以理解的是,电子设备100还可以包含其他获取日程活动的方式,本申请实施例对此不作限制。It can be understood that the electronic device 100 may also include other ways of acquiring schedule activities, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.

活动属性用于对日程活动进行分类,指示日程活动所属的类型,例如,该活动属性可以包括:睡眠、学习、工作、娱乐、清洁等等。The activity attributes are used to classify the schedule activities, indicating the type of the schedule activities, for example, the activity attributes may include: sleep, study, work, entertainment, cleaning and so on.

电子设备100可以通过以下几种方式确定日程活动的活动属性:The electronic device 100 may determine the activity attribute of the scheduled activity in the following ways:

(1)电子设备100接收用户输入的日程活动(1) The electronic device 100 receives the schedule activity input by the user

具体地,电子设备100可以在日程活动中提供多个活动属性选项,一个活动属性选项对应一个活动属性,电子设备100可以接收到用户作用于其中一个活动属性选项的用户操作,响应于该操作,将该活动属性选项对应的活动属性确定为该日程活动的活动属性。Specifically, the electronic device 100 may provide multiple activity attribute options in the schedule activity, one activity attribute option corresponds to one activity attribute, the electronic device 100 may receive a user operation performed by the user on one of the activity attribute options, and in response to the operation, The activity attribute corresponding to the activity attribute option is determined as the activity attribute of the scheduled activity.

示例性地,图9A中的用户界面61为电子设备100用于添加日程活动的用户界面,电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于活动属性614的触控操作,响应于该操作,显示如图9B所示的用户界面62,该用户界面62用于设置该日程活动的活动属性。电子设备100可以检测到用户作用于选项窗口622的触控操作,选择或输入该日程活动的活动属性。Exemplarily, the user interface 61 in FIG. 9A is a user interface used by the electronic device 100 to add a schedule activity. The electronic device 100 can detect the user's touch operation on the activity attribute 614, and respond to the operation, as shown in FIG. 9B The user interface 62 is shown, and the user interface 62 is used to set the activity attribute of the schedule activity. The electronic device 100 may detect the user's touch operation on the option window 622 to select or input the activity attribute of the scheduled activity.

(2)电子设备100自动确定日程活动的活动属性(2) The electronic device 100 automatically determines the activity attribute of the schedule activity

具体地,电子设备100可以通过以下一个或多个因素来确定该日程活动的活动属性。Specifically, the electronic device 100 may determine the activity attribute of the schedule activity through one or more of the following factors.

1)该日程活动的活动名称1) The activity name of the schedule activity

当电子设备100通过活动名称来确定日程活动的活动属性时,电子设备100可以通过提取活动名称中的关键字,通过关键字分析出最相关的活动属性,例如,当活动名称为“打扫客厅”,则电子设备100可以确定该日程活动的活动属性为清洁。When the electronic device 100 determines the activity attribute of the scheduled activity through the activity name, the electronic device 100 can extract the keywords in the activity name and analyze the most relevant activity attribute through the keyword, for example, when the activity name is "clean the living room" , the electronic device 100 may determine that the activity attribute of the schedule activity is cleaning.

2)该日程活动涉及的相关设备2) Relevant equipment involved in this schedule activity

当电子设备100通过该日程活动涉及的相关设备来确定日程活动的活动属性时,电子设备100可以根据该相关设备的设备类型来确定该日程活动的活动属性。例如,当日程活动需要使用电视,则电子设备100可以确定该日程活动的活动属性为娱乐。When the electronic device 100 determines the activity attribute of the schedule event through related devices involved in the schedule event, the electronic device 100 may determine the activity attribute of the schedule event according to the device type of the related device. For example, when the schedule event requires the use of television, the electronic device 100 may determine that the activity attribute of the schedule event is entertainment.

3)历史相关的日程活动3) History related schedule activities

当日程活动为再次开展的活动时,电子设备100可以根据该日程活动之前确定的活动属性来确定此次日程活动的活动属性。When the scheduled activity is an activity to be carried out again, the electronic device 100 may determine the activity attribute of the scheduled activity according to the previously determined activity attribute of the scheduled activity.

可以理解的是,不限于上述提及的确定活动属性的方法,本申请实施例对此不作限制。It can be understood that the method for determining the activity attribute is not limited to the above-mentioned method, and this embodiment of the present application makes no limitation thereto.

活动优先级用于对各日程活动的执行顺序进行排序,例如,高优先级的日程活动优先执行,低优先级的日程活动延后执行或者不执行。具体地,电子设备100可以预置各活动属性之间的优先级的大小关系,在电子设备100确定日程活动的活动属性之后,即可确定存在冲突的日程活动的前后执行顺序,或者,电子设备100也可以用户确定的各活动属性之间的优先级大小关系,来确定存在冲突的日程活动的前后执行顺序。The activity priority is used to sort the execution order of each schedule activity, for example, the schedule activity with high priority is executed first, and the schedule activity with low priority is delayed or not executed. Specifically, the electronic device 100 can preset the priority relationship between the various activity attributes, and after the electronic device 100 determines the activity attributes of the schedule activities, it can determine the execution sequence of the conflicting schedule activities, or the electronic device 100 may also determine the execution sequence of conflicting schedule activities based on the priority relationship between the various activity attributes determined by the user.

示例性地,图9B中的优先级窗口623示出了电子设备100预置的各活动属性之间的优先级大小关系,且优先级窗口623中的更多选项623A可以检测到用户的触控操作,响应于该操作,电子设备100为用户提供自定义活动优先级的输入窗口。Exemplarily, the priority window 623 in FIG. 9B shows the priority size relationship between the various activity attributes preset by the electronic device 100, and the more option 623A in the priority window 623 can detect the user's touch In response to the operation, the electronic device 100 provides the user with an input window for customizing activity priorities.

S102.电子设备100获得该日程活动的相关设备的配置信息。S102. The electronic device 100 obtains configuration information of related devices of the schedule event.

日程活动的相关设备可以为家庭中与参与该日程活动的工作设备。具体关于工作设备的描述可以参见内容,这里不再赘述。配置信息用于控制该相关设备的工作,例如,该配置信息可以包括该相关设备的工作状态、工作模式、工作范围等等信息。示例性地,图8A和图8B示例性示出了配置扫地机器人和智能台灯的配置信息的用户界面。The related equipment of the schedule activity may be the work equipment in the family and participating in the schedule activity. For the specific description of the working equipment, please refer to the content, and will not repeat them here. The configuration information is used to control the work of the related device, for example, the configuration information may include the working status, working mode, working range and other information of the related device. Exemplarily, FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B exemplarily show a user interface for configuring configuration information of a cleaning robot and a smart desk lamp.

可以理解的是,当日程活动中不涉及相关设备时,电子设备100可以不执行步骤S102。It can be understood that, when no related device is involved in the schedule activity, the electronic device 100 may not execute step S102.

S103.电子设备100判断是否存在冲突的日程活动。S103. The electronic device 100 determines whether there is a conflicting schedule event.

电子设备100判断冲突的日程活动的方式可以包括但不限于以下几种:Ways for the electronic device 100 to determine conflicting schedule activities may include but not limited to the following:

(1)多个日程活动存在时间冲突(1) Multiple schedule activities have time conflicts

多个日程活动存在时间冲突可以是指同一时间段里存在多个日程活动,即多个日程活动存在重叠的活动时间。Time conflicts among multiple schedule activities may refer to multiple schedule activities in the same time period, that is, multiple schedule activities have overlapping activity times.

(2)多个日程活动存在时间冲突,且涉及到相同的工作设备的不同配置信息(2) Multiple schedule activities have time conflicts and involve different configuration information of the same working equipment

也即是说,同一个时间段可以存在多个同时执行的日程活动,但当这多个同时执行的日程活动存在相同的工作设备,且工作设备的配置信息不同,则电子设备100判断这多个日程活动存在冲突。例如,存在一个9:00-10:00的日程活动,该日程活动需要只用扫地机器人打扫卫生,还存在一个9:30-10:30的日程活动,该日程活动需要关闭扫地机器人,则可以看出,9:30-10:00中,扫地机器人存在两种不同的工作状态,因此这两个日程活动冲突。That is to say, there may be multiple concurrently executed schedule activities in the same time period, but when the same working equipment exists in the multiple simultaneously executed schedule activities, and the configuration information of the working equipment is different, then the electronic device 100 judges how many A schedule event conflicts. For example, if there is a 9:00-10:00 schedule activity, which needs to be cleaned only by the sweeping robot, and there is also a 9:30-10:30 schedule activity, which needs to turn off the sweeping robot, then you can It can be seen that from 9:30 to 10:00, the sweeping robot has two different working states, so the two schedule activities conflict.

(3)多个日程活动存在时间冲突,且涉及到不同设备属性的工作设备(3) Multiple schedule activities have time conflicts and involve working equipment with different equipment attributes

设备属性用于对家庭中涉及到的电子设备进行分类,指示电子设备所属的类型,例如,该设备属性可以包括:随身设备、家务设备、娱乐设备、学习设备等等。The device attributes are used to classify the electronic devices involved in the family and indicate the types of the electronic devices. For example, the device attributes may include: portable devices, household devices, entertainment devices, learning devices, and so on.

其中,电子设备100可以在与工作设备建立通信连接时,确定该工作设备的设备属性。电子设备100可以通过以下两种方式确定工作设备的设备属性:Wherein, the electronic device 100 may determine the device attribute of the working device when establishing a communication connection with the working device. The electronic device 100 may determine the device attribute of the working device in the following two ways:

1)电子设备100根据用户的选择确定工作设备的设备属性1) The electronic device 100 determines the device attribute of the working device according to the user's selection

电子设备100可以在添加工作设备时,提供多个设备属性的选项,以供用户确定该工作设备的设备属性。When adding a working device, the electronic device 100 may provide a plurality of device attribute options for the user to determine the device attribute of the working device.

2)电子设备100自动根据设备的信息确定工作设备的设备属性2) The electronic device 100 automatically determines the device attributes of the working device according to the device information

其中,该信息可以是指工作设备的设备类型、工作设备向电子设备100发送的包含设备属性的指示信息。Wherein, the information may refer to the device type of the working device, and the indication information including device attributes sent by the working device to the electronic device 100 .

可以理解的是,不限于上述提及的确定设备属性的方法,本申请实施例对此不作限制。It can be understood that the method for determining the device attribute is not limited to the above-mentioned method, and this embodiment of the present application does not make a limitation thereto.

也即是说,当同一个时间段存在多个日程活动,且这多个日程活动涉及到设备属性不同的相关设备,则电子设备100判断这多个日程活动存在冲突。例如,存在一个10:00-10:30的 日程活动,该日程活动需要使用到设备属性为学习设备的学习机,还存在一个10:00-10:30的日程活动,该日程活动需要使用到设备属性为娱乐设备的电视,则可以看出,10:00-10:30存在的两个日程活动需要使用到两个设备属性不同的工作设备,则电子设备100可以判断这两个日程活动冲突。That is to say, when there are multiple scheduled activities in the same time period, and the multiple scheduled activities involve related devices with different device attributes, the electronic device 100 determines that there is a conflict among the multiple scheduled activities. For example, there is a 10:00-10:30 schedule activity, which needs to use the learning machine whose device attribute is learning equipment, and there is also a 10:00-10:30 schedule activity, which needs to use the For a TV whose device attribute is an entertainment device, it can be seen that the two schedule activities in 10:00-10:30 need to use two working devices with different device attributes, and the electronic device 100 can determine that the two schedule activities conflict .

当电子设备100判断存在冲突的日程活动时,执行步骤S104。When the electronic device 100 determines that there is a conflicting schedule event, step S104 is performed.

S104.电子设备100判断冲突的日程活动之间是否存在干扰。S104. The electronic device 100 determines whether there is interference between conflicting schedule activities.

由于冲突的日程活动之间也可以存在同时执行的可能,电子设备100可以在确定存在冲突的日程活动之后进一步判断这些存在冲突的日程活动之间是否存在干扰。例如,同一时间虽然存在小朋友学习以及家长看电视的日程活动,但是,电视播放的声音大小可能不足以影响到小朋友的学习,因此这两个存在冲突的日程活动可以同时执行。Since the conflicting schedule activities may be executed at the same time, the electronic device 100 may further determine whether there is interference between these conflicting schedule activities after determining the conflicting schedule activities. For example, although there are schedule activities for children to study and parents to watch TV at the same time, the volume of the sound played on the TV may not be enough to affect the children's study, so these two conflicting schedule activities can be executed simultaneously.

具体地,冲突的日程活动之间可能存在以下几种干扰:Specifically, the following types of interference may exist between conflicting schedule activities:

(1)音量干扰(1) Volume interference

当冲突的日程活动是指存在时间冲突,且涉及到不同设备属性的工作设备的日程活动,电子设备100可以通过随身设备,例如手机、手环、手表、耳机、智能眼镜等设备进行音量检测,检测工作设备发出的声音是否会影响到另外一个日程活动的开展。具体地,当电子设备100检测出一个日程活动中存在工作设备产生或预设的音量超过阈值(例如40分贝),则电子设备100判断该日程活动会对其他存在冲突的日程活动产生干扰。When the conflicting schedule activity refers to a schedule activity that has a time conflict and involves work equipment with different equipment attributes, the electronic device 100 can perform volume detection through portable devices such as mobile phones, wristbands, watches, earphones, smart glasses, etc. Detect whether the sound from work equipment will affect the development of another scheduled activity. Specifically, when the electronic device 100 detects that the volume produced by working equipment or preset exceeds a threshold (for example, 40 decibels) in a scheduled activity, the electronic device 100 determines that the scheduled activity will interfere with other conflicting scheduled activities.

(2)范围干扰(2) range interference

范围干扰是指两个同时执行的日程活动存在活动范围上的重叠。例如,存在一个日程活动为扫地机器人打扫卫生,其活动范围包括餐厅和客厅,同时存在另外一个日程活动,用户在客厅健身,则扫地机器人在客厅打扫卫生时会干扰到用户在客厅的健身活动。Range interference refers to the overlap in the range of activities of two concurrently executing scheduled activities. For example, if there is a scheduled activity for the cleaning robot, its activity range includes the dining room and the living room, and there is another scheduled activity for the user to exercise in the living room, the cleaning robot will interfere with the user's fitness activities in the living room.

(3)逻辑干扰(3) Logic interference

逻辑干扰是指在人的公知常识上两个日程活动同时执行会存在干扰的情况。例如,打开窗户通风和开启空调制冷存在逻辑干扰,用户在阳台晾洗衣服时进行绿植自动浇水存在逻辑干扰。Logical interference refers to the situation where two schedule activities are executed at the same time and there will be interference based on people's common knowledge. For example, there is logical interference between opening the windows for ventilation and turning on the air conditioner for cooling, and there is logical interference when the user automatically waters the green plants while drying clothes on the balcony.

可以理解的是,不限于上述提及的干扰,在本申请实施例对此不作限制。另外,步骤S104为可选的步骤,电子设备100可以在判断存在冲突的日程活动之后,执行步骤S105。It can be understood that it is not limited to the interference mentioned above, and this is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. In addition, step S104 is an optional step, and the electronic device 100 may execute step S105 after determining that there is a conflicting schedule activity.

当电子设备100判断冲突的日程活动之间存在干扰,执行步骤S105。When the electronic device 100 determines that there is interference between the conflicting schedule activities, step S105 is executed.

S105.电子设备100根据活动的优先级、以及相关设备的配置信息控制相关设备的工作。S105. The electronic device 100 controls the work of the related device according to the priority of the activity and the configuration information of the related device.

图12示出了步骤S105涉及的详细流程示意图。FIG. 12 shows a detailed flowchart of step S105.

如图12所示,步骤S105可具体包括:As shown in Figure 12, step S105 may specifically include:

S1051.电子设备100根据活动的优先级调整存在冲突的日程活动。S1051. The electronic device 100 adjusts the conflicting schedule activities according to the priorities of the activities.

具体地,电子设备100调整存在冲突的日程活动是指不更改优先级高的日程活动,更改优先级低的日程活动,使电子设备100可以优先保证优先级高的日程活动的顺利进行,优先低的日程活动可以不执行、延后执行或更改执行内容。Specifically, the electronic device 100 adjusting the conflicting schedule activities means not changing the schedule activities with high priority, but changing the schedule activities with low priority, so that the electronic device 100 can give priority to ensuring the smooth progress of the schedule activities with high priority, and the schedule activities with low priority The scheduled activities can not be executed, postponed, or the execution content can be changed.

其中,更改优先级低的日程活动是指,电子设备100可以延后该优先级低的日程活动的活动时间、调整优先级低的日程活动的相关设备的配置信息,或者删除该优先级低的日程活动。例如,存在两个日程活动,一个是9:00-10:00的扫地机器人打扫客厅和卧室的日程活动,一个是9:00-10:00的用户在卧室办公的日程活动,电子设备100可以将扫地机器人打扫卫生 的日程活动延迟到10:00-11:00,或者,将扫地机器人打扫的范围调整为仅打扫客厅。Wherein, changing the schedule activity with low priority means that the electronic device 100 can postpone the activity time of the schedule activity with low priority, adjust the configuration information of related devices of the schedule activity with low priority, or delete the schedule activity with low priority. schedule activities. For example, there are two schedule activities, one is the schedule activity of the sweeping robot cleaning the living room and bedroom from 9:00 to 10:00, and the other is the schedule activity of the user working in the bedroom from 9:00 to 10:00, the electronic device 100 can Delay the cleaning schedule of the sweeping robot to 10:00-11:00, or adjust the cleaning range of the sweeping robot to only clean the living room.

S1052.电子设备100确定调整后的日程活动的相关设备是否在线。S1052. The electronic device 100 determines whether the device related to the adjusted schedule activity is online.

相关设备是否在线是指该相关设备是否与电子设备100建立通信连接,或者,相关设备是否开机。Whether the related device is online refers to whether the related device establishes a communication connection with the electronic device 100, or whether the related device is powered on.

当相关设备在线,则电子设备100执行步骤S1054,否则,执行步骤S1053。When the related device is online, the electronic device 100 executes step S1054, otherwise, executes step S1053.

也就是说,当相关设备在线,电子设备100可以直接将该调整后的日程活动中,该相关设备的配置信息发送给该相关设备,以供相关设备根据该调整后的配置信息进行工作,当相关设备不在线,则电子设备100无法直接将该调整后的配置信息发送给该相关设备,或者相关设备无法接收到该调整后的配置信息,因此,相关设备可以在上线后,通过广播的方式,请求获取该配置信息,以供电子设备100在得知相关设备上线后,将该调整后的配置信息发送给该相关设备。That is to say, when the related device is online, the electronic device 100 can directly send the configuration information of the related device in the adjusted schedule activity to the related device, so that the related device can work according to the adjusted configuration information. If the related device is not online, the electronic device 100 cannot directly send the adjusted configuration information to the related device, or the related device cannot receive the adjusted configuration information. , to request to obtain the configuration information, so that the electronic device 100 can send the adjusted configuration information to the related device after learning that the related device is online.

S1053.电子设备100接收到相关设备上线后请求获取配置信息的指示信息。S1053. The electronic device 100 receives the indication information that the relevant device requests to obtain configuration information after it goes online.

S1054.电子设备100将该相关设备的配置信息发送给该相关设备,以供相关设备根据该配置信息进行工作。S1054. The electronic device 100 sends the configuration information of the related device to the related device, so that the related device can work according to the configuration information.

其中,相关设备接收到的配置信息可能为更改后的配置信息,也可能为未更改的配置信息。当相关设备接收到的配置信息为未更改的配置信息,则说明该未更改的配置信息对应的日程活动不存在冲突或干扰,或暂时未发现冲突或干扰。当相关设备接收到的配置信息为更改后的配置信息,则此时可能存在两个情况,一种是该更改后的配置信息为相关设备首次接收到的该配置信息对应的日程活动的配置信息,一种是该更改后的配置信息为相关设备再次接收到的该配置信息对应的日程活动的配置信息,针对第二种情况,相关设备可以按照最近接收到的配置信息来执行该日程活动,使相关设备能够按照调整后的配置信息进行工作,避免出现日程活动冲突的情况。Wherein, the configuration information received by the relevant device may be changed configuration information or unchanged configuration information. When the configuration information received by the relevant device is unchanged configuration information, it means that there is no conflict or interference in the schedule activity corresponding to the unchanged configuration information, or no conflict or interference has been found for the time being. When the configuration information received by the relevant device is the changed configuration information, there may be two situations at this time, one is that the changed configuration information is the configuration information of the schedule activity corresponding to the configuration information received by the relevant device for the first time , one is that the changed configuration information is the configuration information of the schedule activity corresponding to the configuration information received by the relevant device again, and for the second case, the relevant device can execute the schedule activity according to the configuration information recently received, Make relevant equipment work according to the adjusted configuration information, avoiding the conflict of schedule activities.

另外,在本申请实施例中,电子设备100调整日程活动之后,还可以将该调整后的日程活动以及不存在冲突的日程活动以列表的形式展示在用户界面中,以供用户查看这一个或多个日程活动,使用户能够清楚地了解这些日程活动的活动内容和具体执行情况。示例性地,图10A示出了电子设备100展示日程活动的用户界面71,用户可以通过活动列表714查看和管理一个或多个日程活动,其中,状态图标7141B和状态图标7141C可用于指示日程活动的执行状态。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, after the electronic device 100 adjusts the schedule activities, it can also display the adjusted schedule activities and the schedule activities without conflicts in the user interface in the form of a list, so that the user can view this one or Multiple schedule activities, so that users can clearly understand the activity content and specific execution status of these schedule activities. Exemplarily, FIG. 10A shows a user interface 71 where the electronic device 100 displays schedule activities, and the user can view and manage one or more schedule activities through the activity list 714, wherein a status icon 7141B and a status icon 7141C can be used to indicate schedule activities execution status.

需要注意的是,电子设备100为控制设备,控制设备用于接收用户输入的日程活动,并根据日程活动确定存在冲突的场景,调整日程活动的执行顺序,与工作设备建立通信连接,向工作设备下发配置信息,控制工作设备的工作。由于智能家居场景中可以包括多个控制设备,一个控制设备可以为家庭中的一个家庭成员提供服务,电子设备100可以为家庭中的其中一个用户使用的设备,在电子设备100获取到日程活动之后,还可以将该日程活动发送给家庭中的其他控制设备,以供家庭中的所有成员能够查看到相同的日程活动。It should be noted that the electronic device 100 is a control device, and the control device is used to receive the schedule activities input by the user, determine conflicting scenarios according to the schedule activities, adjust the execution order of the schedule activities, establish a communication connection with the work equipment, and send Send configuration information to control the work of the working equipment. Since multiple control devices can be included in the smart home scene, one control device can provide services for a family member in the family, and the electronic device 100 can be a device used by one of the users in the family. After the electronic device 100 obtains the schedule activities , the schedule event can also be sent to other control devices in the family, so that all members of the family can view the same schedule event.

在一些实施例中,在电子设备100控制工作设备工作的过程中,该电子设备100可以是指性能最好、负载最小或者创建家庭的电子设备,也可以是指首次获得日程活动的电子设备,该日程活动为此次控制工作设备工作的日程活动。也即是说,向工作设备下发配置信息的控制设备可以为所有控制设备中性能最好、负载最小或者创建家庭的设备,或者为日程活动中的发布者等等,本申请实施例对此不作限制。In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 controls the work of the working device, the electronic device 100 may refer to the electronic device with the best performance, the least load, or the creation of a family, or the electronic device that obtains the schedule activity for the first time, The schedule activity is the schedule activity for controlling the work of the work equipment. That is to say, the control device that sends configuration information to the working device can be the device with the best performance, the least load, or a family among all the control devices, or the publisher in the schedule activity, etc. No limit.

在一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以接收到用户的操作,更改日程活动的相关设备的配置信息,从而改变该相关设备的工作设备。这样,电子设备100除了可以自行调整日程活动的内容之外,还可以接收到用户的操作调整日程活动的内容,增强用户的可操作性行,提高调整日程活动的自由度。In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may also receive a user's operation to change the configuration information of the related device of the schedule event, thereby changing the working device of the related device. In this way, the electronic device 100 can not only adjust the contents of the schedule activities by itself, but also can adjust the contents of the schedule activities by receiving the user's operation, which enhances the user's operability and improves the freedom of adjusting the schedule activities.

总的来说,本申请实施例提供的活动管理方法能够结合用户输入、AI识别技术、其他设备等手段获得日程活动,从而实现更加精确、完善地获得日程活动,并在此技术上,通过设置活动优先级解决存在冲突的日程活动,并根据日程活动控制家庭中的各设备,避免了各日程活动之间的干扰,帮助用户井然有序地管理家庭,提升用户的居家体验感。In general, the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application can combine user input, AI recognition technology, other equipment and other means to obtain schedule activities, so as to achieve more accurate and complete acquisition of schedule activities, and in this technology, by setting The activity priority solves the conflicting schedule activities, and controls the devices in the family according to the schedule activities, avoids the interference between the schedule activities, helps users manage the family in an orderly manner, and improves the user's sense of home experience.

图13示出了本申请实施例提供的活动管理方法的流程示意图。Fig. 13 shows a schematic flowchart of the activity management method provided by the embodiment of the present application.

如图13所示,该方法包括:As shown in Figure 13, the method includes:

S201.第一设备获得第一活动,该第一活动包括第一工作设备的第一配置信息。S201. The first device obtains a first activity, where the first activity includes first configuration information of a first working device.

第一设备可以是指如图2所示的通信系统1000中的任意一个控制设备,也可以是指电子设备100。第一活动可以是指用户安排的日程活动。The first device may refer to any control device in the communication system 1000 shown in FIG. 2 , and may also refer to the electronic device 100 . The first activity may refer to a schedule activity arranged by the user.

其中,第一设备可以通过用户输入、主动生成或其他设备获得该第一活动。具体关于第一设备获取第一活动的方式可以参见前述关于第一设备获取日程活动的内容,这里不再赘述。Wherein, the first device may obtain the first activity through user input, active generation or other devices. For details about how the first device acquires the first event, refer to the aforementioned content about the first device acquiring the schedule event, which will not be repeated here.

第一工作设备可以是指如图2所示的通信系统1000任意一个或多个工作设备,第一配置信息可用于控制第一工作设备的执行该第一活动相关的操作(例如第一操作),以便第一工作设备完成在第一活动中需要提供的家庭服务。其中,该第一配置信息可以包括该第一工作设备的工作状态、工作参数等等信息,该工作参数可以包括:音量、温度、范围、距离、工作模式或亮度等等。具体关于第一工作设备以及第一配置信息的描述可以参见前述工作设备以及配置信息的描述,这里不再赘述。The first working device may refer to any one or more working devices in the communication system 1000 as shown in FIG. , so that the first working device completes the home service that needs to be provided in the first activity. Wherein, the first configuration information may include the working state, working parameters and other information of the first working device, and the working parameters may include: volume, temperature, range, distance, working mode or brightness and so on. For specific descriptions about the first working device and the first configuration information, reference may be made to the foregoing description of the working device and configuration information, which will not be repeated here.

在一些实施例中,该第一活动可以为第一设备通过其他控制设备获得。具体地,第一设备可以获取第二设备上的第一活动。也就是说,家庭中的一个用户可以通过在第二设备上设置第一活动,使家庭中的另一个用户可以通过第一设备获取到该第一活动。这样,可以做到家庭成员们共享各自在手机等电子设备上设置的日程活动,加强家庭成员间在日程活动中的关联度。或者,第一活动可以为第一设备根据获取的信息生成的活动,例如,通过采集应用程序的信息生成的日程活动。In some embodiments, the first activity can be obtained by the first device through other control devices. Specifically, the first device may acquire the first activity on the second device. That is to say, one user in the family can set the first activity on the second device, so that another user in the family can obtain the first activity through the first device. In this way, it is possible for family members to share their respective schedule activities set on electronic devices such as mobile phones, thereby strengthening the relationship between family members in schedule activities. Alternatively, the first activity may be an activity generated by the first device according to the acquired information, for example, a schedule activity generated by collecting information of an application program.

在一些实施例中,在用户通过第一设备的用户界面(例如图9A)设置第一活动时,第一设备可以显示第一设置界面(例如图8A或图8B),第一设备可以检测到用户在该第一设置界面的第一设置,为第一活动中涉及到的工作设备(例如第一工作设备)设置配置信息(例如第一配置信息)。In some embodiments, when the user sets the first activity through the user interface of the first device (such as FIG. 9A), the first device may display the first setting interface (such as FIG. 8A or 8B), and the first device may detect In the first setting on the first setting interface, the user sets configuration information (for example, first configuration information) for the working equipment involved in the first activity (for example, the first working equipment).

在一些实施例中,在用户通过第一设备的用户界面(例如图9A)设置第一活动时,第一设备还可以接收到用户选择活动的活动成员的操作(例如作用于图9A中的通知成员615的操作),在完成活动的设置后,第一设备可以提醒该活动的活动成员,该活动的相关情况,例如告知活动成员该活动的相关信息,或提醒用户活动即将开始等等。In some embodiments, when the user sets the first activity through the user interface of the first device (for example, FIG. 9A ), the first device may also receive an operation by the user to select an activity member of the activity (for example, the notification in FIG. 9A ). Member 615), after completing the setting of the activity, the first device can remind the activity members of the activity, the relevant situation of the activity, for example, inform the activity members of the relevant information of the activity, or remind the user that the activity is about to start and so on.

S202.第一设备将该第一配置信息发送给第一工作设备。S202. The first device sends the first configuration information to the first working device.

第一设备可以在以下几种情况下触发向第一工作设备发送给第一配置信息:The first device may trigger sending the first configuration information to the first working device in the following situations:

1)第一设备在获得第一活动后,即触发向第一工作设备发送该第一配置信息1) After the first device acquires the first activity, it triggers sending the first configuration information to the first working device

也就是说,第一设备在获得一个日程活动后,便会触发根据向该日程活动涉及的工作设 备发送配置信息,以便工作设备能够及时地根据日程活动完成相应的工作。That is to say, after the first device obtains a schedule activity, it will trigger to send configuration information to the working equipment involved in the schedule activity, so that the working equipment can complete the corresponding work in time according to the schedule activity.

2)第一设备在接收到用户操作后,向第一工作设备发送第一配置信息2) After receiving the user operation, the first device sends the first configuration information to the first working device

该用户操作可以是指用户触发执行第一活动的操作,例如,用户可以在设备完成一天的日程活动后,触发将所有日程活动中配置信息发送给相应的工作设备,这样,第一设备可以在接收到一天的日程活动后,对这些日程活动进行调整,避免出现日程活动冲突的情况,从而避免工作设备接收到冲突的配置信息。The user operation may refer to an operation in which the user triggers the execution of the first activity. For example, after the device completes a day's schedule activities, the user may trigger the sending of configuration information in all schedule activities to the corresponding working device. In this way, the first device can After receiving the schedule activities of a day, adjust these schedule activities to avoid conflicts of schedule activities, thereby preventing the working equipment from receiving conflicting configuration information.

可以理解的是,步骤S202可以为S201之后和S208之前执行的任意一个步骤,本申请实施例地步骤S202的执行顺序不作限制。It can be understood that step S202 may be any step performed after S201 and before S208, and the execution order of step S202 in this embodiment of the present application is not limited.

S203.第一设备获得第二活动,该第二活动包括第二工作设备的第二配置信息。S203. The first device obtains a second activity, where the second activity includes second configuration information of the second working device.

第二活动也是指用户安排的日程活动。第二工作设备为可以是指如图2所示的通信系统1000任意一个或多个工作设备,第二配置信息可用于控制第二工作设备的工作,以便第二工作设备完成在第二活动中需要提供的家庭服务。其中,该第二配置信息可以包括该第二工作设备的工作状态、工作时间、工作模式、工作范围等等信息。具体关于第二工作设备以及第二配置信息的描述可以参见前述工作设备以及配置信息的描述,这里不再赘述。第一设备可以通过用户输入、主动生成或其他设备获得该第二活动。The second activity also refers to a schedule activity arranged by the user. The second working device may refer to any one or more working devices in the communication system 1000 shown in FIG. 2 , and the second configuration information may be used to control the work of the second working device so that the second working device completes the second activity Home services that need to be provided. Wherein, the second configuration information may include the working state, working time, working mode, working range and other information of the second working device. For specific descriptions about the second working device and the second configuration information, reference may be made to the foregoing description of the working device and configuration information, which will not be repeated here. The first device may obtain the second activity through user input, active generation, or other means.

在一些实施例中,第二活动可以为用户在第一设备上设置的日程活动。具体地,在第一设备获得第二活动之前,第一设备可以显示一个用户界面(例如,图9A所示的用户界面61),该用户界面可用于提示用户输入日程活动,用户可以在该用户界面上设置日程活动的活动时间、通知成员、相关设备、重复时间等等内容。In some embodiments, the second activity may be a schedule activity set by the user on the first device. Specifically, before the first device obtains the second activity, the first device may display a user interface (for example, the user interface 61 shown in FIG. Set the activity time, notification members, related equipment, repeat time and other content of the schedule activity on the interface.

S204.第一设备判断第一活动与第二活动是否冲突。S204. The first device determines whether the first activity conflicts with the second activity.

第一活动与第二活动冲突可以是指第一活动与第二活动的时间冲突,该第一活动与第二活动的时间冲突是指第一活动的活动时间与第二活动的活动时间存在重叠的时间段。或者,进一步地第一活动与第二活动冲突还包括:The conflict between the first activity and the second activity may refer to the time conflict between the first activity and the second activity, and the time conflict between the first activity and the second activity means that the activity time of the first activity overlaps with the activity time of the second activity time period. Or, the further conflict between the first activity and the second activity also includes:

1)第一设备和第二设备相同,且,第一配置信息与第二配置信息不同1) The first device is the same as the second device, and the first configuration information is different from the second configuration information

也即是说,在第一活动与第二活动时间冲突,且,涉及到同一个工作设备的不同配置信息,则第一设备判断第一活动与第二活动冲突。That is to say, when the first activity conflicts with the second activity and involves different configuration information of the same working device, the first device determines that the first activity conflicts with the second activity.

2)第一活动和第二活动的属性不同2) The attributes of the first activity and the second activity are different

也即是说,在第一活动与第二活动时间冲突,且,涉及到不同设备属性的工作设备时,第一设备判断第一活动与第二活动冲突,或者,在第一活动与第二活动时间冲突,且,第一活动与第二活动的活动属性不同,则第一设备判断第一活动与第二活动冲突。That is to say, when the time of the first activity and the second activity conflict, and when working equipment with different equipment attributes is involved, the first equipment judges that the first activity and the second activity conflict, or, when the first activity and the second activity If the activity time conflicts, and the activity attributes of the first activity and the second activity are different, the first device determines that the first activity conflicts with the second activity.

3)第一活动和第二活动的活动成员相同3) The activity members of the first activity and the second activity are the same

也即是说,第一活动与第二活动时间冲突,且,涉及到相同的活动成员时,第一设备判断第一活动与第二活动冲突。其中,活动成员是指该日程活动的执行对象。例如小朋友做家庭作业的日程活动中,小朋友即为该日程活动的活动成员。That is to say, the first activity conflicts with the second activity time, and when the same activity member is involved, the first device determines that the first activity conflicts with the second activity. Wherein, an activity member refers to an execution object of the schedule activity. For example, in a schedule activity of a child doing homework, the child is an active member of the schedule activity.

具体关于第一设备判断第一设备与第二设备是否冲突的方式可以参见前述电子设备100判断冲突的日程活动的相关内容,这里不再赘述。For details about the manner in which the first device determines whether the first device conflicts with the second device, please refer to the relevant content of the aforementioned electronic device 100 determining conflicting schedule activities, which will not be repeated here.

在一些实施例中,当第一活动或第二活动时间冲突时,第一设备可以调整第一活动的活动时间或第二活动的活动时间,从而避免第一活动和第二活动在同一时间段同时执行。In some embodiments, when the time of the first activity or the second activity conflicts, the first device may adjust the activity time of the first activity or the activity time of the second activity, so as to avoid that the first activity and the second activity are in the same time period Execute at the same time.

在一些实施例中,第一设备可以在第一活动与第二活动出现上述情况2和情况3所述的 冲突时提醒用户,例如显示提示信息,提示用户第一活动和第二活动冲突。In some embodiments, the first device may remind the user when the first activity and the second activity conflict as described in the above-mentioned situations 2 and 3, for example, display a prompt message to remind the user that the first activity and the second activity conflict.

在另一些实施例中,第一设备可以在第一活动与第二活动出现上述情况1所述的冲突时调整第一配置信息或第二配置信息。In some other embodiments, the first device may adjust the first configuration information or the second configuration information when the first activity and the second activity conflict as described in the above case 1.

当第一设备判断第一活动与第二活动冲突,执行步骤S205,否则,执行步骤S209。When the first device judges that the first activity conflicts with the second activity, step S205 is performed; otherwise, step S209 is performed.

S205.第一设备判断第一活动与第二活动是否存在干扰。S205. The first device determines whether there is interference between the first activity and the second activity.

第一活动与第二活动存在干扰可能是指第一活动与第二活动之间存在音量干扰、范围干扰、逻辑干扰。其中,音量干扰是指第一活动或第二活动中涉及的工作设备的音量较大,会影响第一活动或第二活动中的另一个日程活动的正常开展,范围干扰是指第一活动或第二活动中涉及的工作设备的工作范围,会影响第一活动或第二活动中的另一个日程活动的正常开展,逻辑干扰是指第一活动和第二活动在人的公知常识下认为不能同时执行的两个日程活动。具体关于第一设备判断第一活动与第二活动是否干扰的方式可以参见前述冲突的日程活动之间可能存在的几种干扰的相关内容,这里不再赘述。Interference between the first activity and the second activity may refer to volume interference, range interference, or logic interference between the first activity and the second activity. Among them, volume interference refers to the loud volume of the working equipment involved in the first activity or the second activity, which will affect the normal development of another scheduled activity in the first activity or the second activity, and range interference refers to the first or second activity. The working scope of the work equipment involved in the second activity will affect the normal development of the first activity or another scheduled activity in the second activity. Logical interference means that the first activity and the second activity cannot be considered under the common knowledge of people. Two schedule activities that execute concurrently. For details about the manner in which the first device judges whether the first activity interferes with the second activity, reference may be made to the related contents of several types of interference that may exist between conflicting schedule activities, which will not be repeated here.

在一些实施例中,第一设备可以通过随身设备,例如,手机、手表、手环、耳机等设备,检测开展第一活动时,第一设备发出的音量大小,当音量大小大于阈值时,则第一设备确定在执行第一活动时,执行第二活动会出现第一活动干扰第二活动。In some embodiments, the first device can use portable devices, such as mobile phones, watches, bracelets, earphones and other devices, to detect the volume of the first device when the first activity is carried out. When the volume is greater than the threshold, then The first device determines that when the first activity is performed, the first activity interferes with the second activity when the second activity is performed.

当第一设备判断第一活动与第二活动存在干扰,执行步骤S206,否则,执行步骤S209。When the first device determines that there is interference between the first activity and the second activity, step S206 is performed; otherwise, step S209 is performed.

S206.第一设备判断第一活动的优先级是否小于第二活动的优先级。S206. The first device determines whether the priority of the first activity is lower than the priority of the second activity.

第一设备可以在第一活动或第二活动存在冲突,或者,进一步存在干扰时,调整第一活动和第二活动,优先保证优先级高的日程活动的正常进行,优先级低的日程活动可以不执行,或更改优先级低的日程活动的活动内容,例如,延后优先级低的日程活动的活动时间,或者,修改优先级低的日程活动中涉及的工作设备的配置信息。The first device may adjust the first activity and the second activity when there is a conflict between the first activity and the second activity, or when there is further interference, to give priority to ensuring the normal progress of the scheduled activity with a high priority, and to ensure the normal progress of the scheduled activity with a low priority. Do not execute or change the activity content of the low-priority scheduled activity, for example, postpone the activity time of the low-priority scheduled activity, or modify the configuration information of the working equipment involved in the low-priority scheduled activity.

当第一设备判断第一活动的优先级小于第二活动时,执行步骤S208,否则,执行步骤S207。When the first device judges that the priority of the first activity is lower than that of the second activity, step S208 is performed; otherwise, step S207 is performed.

S207.第一设备调整第二设备的第二配置信息,获得调整后的第二配置信息,将第二活动的调整后的第二配置信息发送给第二设备。S207. The first device adjusts the second configuration information of the second device, obtains the adjusted second configuration information, and sends the adjusted second configuration information of the second activity to the second device.

当第一活动的优先级大于第二活动时,则第一设备可以调整第二活动的活动内容。具体地,第一设备可以更改第二设备的第二配置信息,使调整后的第二活动中,第二设备的工作不会影响到第一活动。When the priority of the first activity is higher than that of the second activity, the first device may adjust the activity content of the second activity. Specifically, the first device may change the second configuration information of the second device, so that in the adjusted second activity, the work of the second device will not affect the first activity.

S208.第一设备调整第一设备的第一配置信息,获得调整后的第一配置信息,将第一活动的调整后的第一配置信息发送给第一设备。S208. The first device adjusts the first configuration information of the first device, obtains the adjusted first configuration information, and sends the adjusted first configuration information of the first activity to the first device.

当第一活动的优先级小于第二活动时,则第一设备可以调整第一活动的活动内容。具体地,第一设备可以更改第一设备的第一配置信息,是调整后的第一活动中,第一设备的工作不会影响到第二活动。When the priority of the first activity is lower than that of the second activity, the first device may adjust the activity content of the first activity. Specifically, the first device may change the first configuration information of the first device, so that in the adjusted first activity, the work of the first device will not affect the second activity.

需要注意的是,在第一设备与第二设备为同一设备的情况下,电子设备100不执行步骤S208。It should be noted that, in the case that the first device and the second device are the same device, the electronic device 100 does not execute step S208.

S209.第一设备将第二活动的第二配置信息发送给第二设备。S209. The first device sends the second configuration information of the second activity to the second device.

由于第一活动的优先级小于第二活动,因此第一设备不调整第二活动,第一设备可以直接将第二活动的第二配置信息发送给第二设备,以供第二设备根据该第二配置信息进行工作。Since the priority of the first activity is lower than that of the second activity, the first device does not adjust the second activity, and the first device can directly send the second configuration information of the second activity to the second device, so that the second device can configure the second activity according to the second activity. Two configuration information to work.

需要注意的是,步骤S209也可以为步骤S203之后到S208之前执行的任意一个步骤,工作设备最终执行的工作为根据最近一次接收到的配置信息进行工作。It should be noted that step S209 may also be any step performed after step S203 and before step S208, and the final work performed by the working device is to work according to the latest configuration information received.

在一些实施例中,该第一活动还可以包括第三工作设备的第三配置信息,该第三配置信息用于控制第三工作设备执行第一活动相关的第二操作。第一活动与第二活动冲突或干扰时,第一设备可以调整第一活动。这里,第一活动与第二活动冲突或干扰可以是指第一活动的第一配置信息或第三配置信息影响第二活动,则第一设备调整第一配置信息或第二配置信息。具体关于活动冲突或干扰的描述可以参见前述内容。例如,当用户设置的娱乐活动中,娱乐设备的音量影响到了,或将会影响到小朋友的学习活动,则可以调整娱乐设备的音量,从而避免娱乐活动与学习活动的影响,并且,当一个活动包含多个设备的配置信息时,如果竟有部分的设备的配置信息会影响到另一个活动,则控制设备可以仅改变该部分设备的配置信息。这样,可以最大限度保证工作设备按照用户安排的日程活动执行相应的工作。In some embodiments, the first activity may further include third configuration information of the third working device, where the third configuration information is used to control the third working device to perform a second operation related to the first activity. When the first activity conflicts or interferes with the second activity, the first device may adjust the first activity. Here, the conflict or interference between the first activity and the second activity may mean that the first configuration information or the third configuration information of the first activity affects the second activity, and the first device adjusts the first configuration information or the second configuration information. For specific descriptions about activity conflicts or interferences, please refer to the foregoing content. For example, in the entertainment activities set by the user, the volume of the entertainment equipment affects or will affect the children's learning activities, the volume of the entertainment equipment can be adjusted to avoid the impact of entertainment activities and learning activities, and when an activity When the configuration information of multiple devices is included, if the configuration information of some of the devices may affect another activity, the control device may only change the configuration information of this part of the devices. In this way, it can be ensured to the greatest extent that the working device performs corresponding work according to the schedule activities arranged by the user.

在一些实施例中,第一设备将配置信息发送给工作设备可以具体为,第一设备可以在接收到该工作设备请求获取配置信息的获取请求后,将配置信息发送给工作设备。也就是说,工作设备可以在上线后,向其他设备广播消息,请求获取该工作设备的配置信息,避免工作设备在从离线状态进入到在线状态,遗漏该工作设备的配置信息。In some embodiments, the sending of the configuration information to the working device by the first device may specifically be that the first device may send the configuration information to the working device after receiving an acquisition request from the working device to obtain the configuration information. That is to say, after the working device is online, it can broadcast a message to other devices, requesting to obtain the configuration information of the working device, so as to avoid missing the configuration information of the working device when the working device enters the online state from the offline state.

在一些实施例中,第一设备可以主动更改或根据用户的操作更改低优先级的日程活动。另外,在第一设备判断日程活动存在冲突或干扰,第一设备可以,提示用户当前有多个日程活动存在冲突或干扰。In some embodiments, the first device may change the low-priority calendar activity actively or according to the user's operation. In addition, when the first device determines that there is conflict or interference in the schedule activities, the first device may prompt the user that currently there are conflicts or interference in multiple schedule activities.

在一些实施例中,第一活动或第二活动也可以不包含工作设备的配置信息,这时,第一活动第二活动可以仅为一个需要告知用户的提醒活动,例如,用户外出的活动可以不涉及工作设备的配置信息,第一设备可以在到达该活动的活动时间时,提示用户外出。In some embodiments, the first activity or the second activity may not include the configuration information of the working device. At this time, the first activity and the second activity may be only a reminder activity that needs to be notified to the user. For example, the activity of the user going out may be Without involving the configuration information of the working device, the first device may prompt the user to go out when the activity time of the activity is reached.

另外,需要注意的是,在本申请实施例中,第一设备还可以称为第一控制设备,第二设备还可以称为第二控制设备,第一活动还可以称为第一日程活动,第二活动还可以称为第二日程活动,依次类推。另外第一活动的获取方式同样适用于第二活动或更多其他的日程活动,本申请实施例对此不作限制。In addition, it should be noted that in this embodiment of the application, the first device may also be called the first control device, the second device may also be called the second control device, and the first event may also be called the first schedule event. The second activity may also be referred to as a second schedule activity, and so on. In addition, the acquisition method of the first event is also applicable to the second event or other scheduled events, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.

可以理解的是,上述步骤只是示例,本领域技术人员可以通过更多或更少的步骤来实现本发明方案。It can be understood that the above steps are only examples, and those skilled in the art may implement the solution of the present invention through more or less steps.

本申请的各实施方式可以任意进行组合,以实现不同的技术效果。Various implementation modes of the present application can be combined arbitrarily to achieve different technical effects.

在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (such as a floppy disk, a hard disk, or a magnetic tape), an optical medium (such as a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (such as a solid state disk (solid state disk, SSD)), etc.

本领域普通技术人员可以理解实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,该流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于计算机可读取存储介质中,该程序在执 行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。而前述的存储介质包括:ROM或随机存储记忆体RAM、磁碟或者光盘等各种可存储程序代码的介质。Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments are realized. The processes can be completed by computer programs to instruct related hardware. The programs can be stored in computer-readable storage media. When the programs are executed , may include the processes of the foregoing method embodiments. The aforementioned storage medium includes: ROM or random access memory RAM, magnetic disk or optical disk, and other various media that can store program codes.

总之,以上所述仅为本发明技术方案的实施例而已,并非用于限定本发明的保护范围。凡根据本发明的揭露,所作的任何修改、等同替换、改进等,均应包含在本发明的保护范围之内。In a word, the above description is only an embodiment of the technical solution of the present invention, and is not intended to limit the protection scope of the present invention. All modifications, equivalent replacements, improvements, etc. made according to the disclosure of the present invention shall be included in the protection scope of the present invention.

Claims (17)

一种活动管理方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A method for event management, characterized in that the method includes: 第一控制设备获取第一日程活动,所述第一日程活动包括第一工作设备的第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于控制所述第一工作设备执行所述第一日程活动相关的第一操作;The first control device acquires the first schedule activity, the first schedule activity includes first configuration information of the first working equipment, and the first configuration information is used to control the first working equipment to execute the first schedule activity related the first operation of 所述第一控制设备将所述第一配置信息发送给所述第一工作设备执行。The first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device for execution. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, further comprising: 所述第一控制设备获取第二日程活动,所述第二日程活动为第一用户在所述第一控制设备上设置的日程活动,或,所述第二日程活动为所述第一控制设备从第二控制设备获取的日程活动,或,所述第二日程活动为所述第一控制设备通过采集应用程序的信息生成的日程活动。The first control device acquires a second schedule activity, and the second schedule activity is a schedule activity set by the first user on the first control device, or, the second schedule activity is a schedule activity set by the first control device The schedule activity acquired from the second control device, or, the second schedule activity is a schedule activity generated by the first control device by collecting information of an application program. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 2, further comprising: 在所述第一日程活动与所述第二日程活动冲突的情况下,所述第一控制设备提醒所述第一用户,或,所述第一控制设备调整所述第一日程活动或所述第二日程活动。In the case that the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity, the first control device reminds the first user, or the first control device adjusts the first schedule activity or the Second day of activities. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一日程活动对应第一时间,所述第二日程活动对应第二时间;在所述第一日程活动与所述第二日程活动冲突的情况下,所述第一控制设备提醒所述第一用户,具体包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the first schedule activity corresponds to a first time, and the second schedule activity corresponds to a second time; when the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity In the case of , the first control device reminds the first user, which specifically includes: 在所述第一时间与所述第二时间有重叠,且所述第一日程活动关联的用户对象与所述第二日程活动关联的用户对象有重叠的情况下,所述第一控制设备显示提示信息;或When the first time overlaps with the second time, and the user object associated with the first schedule activity overlaps with the user object associated with the second schedule activity, the first control device displays reminder message; or 在所述第一时间与所述第二时间有重叠,且所述第一日程活动的属性与所述第二日程活动的属性有冲突的情况下,所述第一控制设备显示所述提示信息。In the case that the first time overlaps with the second time, and the attribute of the first schedule activity conflicts with the attribute of the second schedule activity, the first control device displays the prompt information . 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一日程活动对应第一时间,所述第二日程活动对应第二时间;在所述第一日程活动与所述第二日程活动冲突的情况下,所述第一控制设备调整所述第一日程活动或所述第二日程活动,具体包括:The method according to claim 3, wherein the first schedule activity corresponds to a first time, and the second schedule activity corresponds to a second time; when the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity In the case of , the first control device adjusts the first schedule activity or the second schedule activity, specifically including: 所述第一控制设备调整所述第一日程活动或所述第二日程活动,具体包括:The adjustment of the first schedule activity or the second schedule activity by the first control device specifically includes: 在所述第一时间与所述第二时间有重叠,且所述第一日程活动关联的用户对象与所述第二日程活动关联的用户对象有重叠的情况下,所述第一控制设备根据所述第一日程活动和所述第二日程活动的优先级,调整所述第一时间或所述第二时间。In the case that the first time overlaps with the second time, and the user object associated with the first schedule activity overlaps with the user object associated with the second schedule activity, the first control device according to The priorities of the first schedule activity and the second schedule activity are adjusted to the first time or the second time. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二日程活动包括第二工作设备的第二配置信息;The method according to claim 3, wherein the second schedule activity includes second configuration information of the second working equipment; 所述在所述第一日程活动与所述第二日程活动冲突的情况下,所述第一控制设备提醒所述第一用户,或,所述第一控制设备调整所述第一日程活动或所述第二日程活动,具体包括:In the case that the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity, the first control device reminds the first user, or, the first control device adjusts the first schedule activity or The second schedule activities specifically include: 在所述第一时间与所述第二时间有重叠,且,所述第一工作设备与所述第二工作设备为同一个设备,且,所述第一配置信息与第二配置信息不同的情况下,所述第一控制设备显示所述提示信息,或,所述第一控制设备调整所述第一配置信息或所述第二配置信息。There is overlap between the first time and the second time, and the first working device and the second working device are the same device, and the first configuration information is different from the second configuration information In some cases, the first control device displays the prompt information, or the first control device adjusts the first configuration information or the second configuration information. 根据权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一日程活动还包括所述第三工作设备的第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息用于控制所述第三工作设备执行所述第一日程活动相关的第二操作。The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the first schedule activity further includes third configuration information of the third working device, and the third configuration information is used to control the third The third working device executes a second operation related to the first schedule activity. 根据权利要求3-7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一日程活动还包括所述第二工作设备的第三配置信息,在所述第一日程活动与所述第二日程活动冲突的情况下,所述第一控制设备调整所述第一日程活动或所述第二日程活动,具体包括:The method according to claims 3-7, wherein the first schedule activity further includes third configuration information of the second working device, and when the first schedule activity conflicts with the second schedule activity In the case of , the first control device adjusts the first schedule activity or the second schedule activity, specifically including: 在所述第一时间与所述第二时间有重叠,且所述第一配置信息对所述第二日程活动有影响的情况下,所述第一控制设备调整所述第一配置信息;或In the case that the first time overlaps with the second time, and the first configuration information has an influence on the second schedule activity, the first control device adjusts the first configuration information; or 在所述第一时间与所述第二时间有重叠,且所述第三配置信息对所述第二日程活动有影响的情况下,所述第一控制设备调整所述第三配置信息。In a case where the first time overlaps with the second time and the third configuration information affects the second schedule activity, the first control device adjusts the third configuration information. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一控制设备将所述第一配置信息发送给所述第一工作设备执行,具体包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein the first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device for execution, specifically comprising: 所述第一控制设备在获取到所述第一日程活动时,将所述第一配置信息发送给所述第一工作设备;或The first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device when acquiring the first schedule activity; or 在所述第一工作设备上线后,所述第一控制设备接收到所述第一工作设备的获取请求后,将所述第一配置信息发送给所述第一工作设备。After the first working device goes online, the first control device sends the first configuration information to the first working device after receiving the acquisition request of the first working device. 根据权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法,所述第一配置信息包括所述第一工作设备工作的时间、工作参数,所述工作参数包括如下一个或多个:音量、温度、范围、距离、工作模式或亮度。According to the method according to any one of claims 1-9, the first configuration information includes the working time and working parameters of the first working device, and the working parameters include one or more of the following: volume, temperature, range , distance, working mode or brightness. 根据权利要求1-10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一控制设备获取第一日程活动,具体包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-10, wherein the acquiring the first schedule activity by the first control device specifically includes: 所述第一控制设备检测用户在第一设置界面的第一设置,所述第一设置包括:所述第一日程活动的第一时间,所述第一工作设备的所述第一配置信息;The first control device detects the first setting of the user on the first setting interface, and the first setting includes: the first time of the first schedule activity, the first configuration information of the first working device; 所述第一控制设备设置所述第一日程活动,所述第一日程活动包括所述第一设置界面的所述第一设置。The first control device sets the first schedule activity, and the first schedule activity includes the first setting on the first setting interface. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一设置还包括选择所述第一日程活动关联的第二用户,所述方法还包括:在设置所述第一日程活动后,所述第一控制设备提醒所述第二用户。The method according to claim 11, wherein the first setting further comprises selecting a second user associated with the first schedule activity, and the method further comprises: after setting the first schedule activity, the The first control device reminds the second user. 根据权利要求1-12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-12, characterized in that the method further comprises: 所述第一控制设备显示第二用户界面,所述第二用户界面显示多个日程活动,所述多个日程活动包括所述第一日程活动和所述第二日程活动。The first control device displays a second user interface, and the second user interface displays a plurality of scheduled activities, and the plurality of scheduled activities include the first scheduled activity and the second scheduled activity. 根据权利要求1-13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一日程活动为:清洁、学习、做饭、出行、睡眠、娱乐或工作。The method according to any one of claims 1-13, wherein the first schedule activity is: cleaning, studying, cooking, traveling, sleeping, entertaining or working. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括:一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括存储器,一个或多个处理器,以及一个或多个程序;所述一个或多个处理器在执行所述一个或多个程序时,使得所述电子设备实现如权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法。An electronic device, characterized in that it includes: an electronic device, characterized in that it includes a memory, one or more processors, and one or more programs; the one or more processors are executing the one or multiple programs, causing the electronic device to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 14. 一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,其特征在于,当所述指令在电子设备上运行时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, comprising instructions, wherein when the instructions are run on an electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 14. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至14任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, when the computer program product is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 14.
PCT/CN2022/122774 2021-10-21 2022-09-29 Activity management method and electronic device Ceased WO2023066008A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111230900.1 2021-10-21
CN202111230900.1A CN116009429A (en) 2021-10-21 2021-10-21 Activity management method and electronic equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023066008A1 true WO2023066008A1 (en) 2023-04-27

Family

ID=86032280

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/122774 Ceased WO2023066008A1 (en) 2021-10-21 2022-09-29 Activity management method and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116009429A (en)
WO (1) WO2023066008A1 (en)

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060041460A1 (en) * 2004-08-23 2006-02-23 Aaron Jeffrey A An electronic calendar
CN101479723A (en) * 2006-06-30 2009-07-08 微软公司 Managing family information
EP3375146A1 (en) * 2015-11-11 2018-09-19 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Systems and methods relating to a smart home manager
WO2019051910A1 (en) * 2017-09-18 2019-03-21 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 Interactive schedule reminding method and apparatus, storage medium and smart home system
CN112766913A (en) * 2021-01-22 2021-05-07 广州富港万嘉智能科技有限公司 Intelligent service method based on schedule information and intelligent home system
CN112785268A (en) * 2021-01-22 2021-05-11 广州富港万嘉智能科技有限公司 Intelligent household service method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN112950142A (en) * 2021-01-26 2021-06-11 珠海格力电器股份有限公司 Method and device for setting equipment operation schedule, storage medium and terminal

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101753699A (en) * 2008-12-15 2010-06-23 乐金电子(中国)研究开发中心有限公司 Mobile terminal and method thereof for classified management of schedule
CN108629548B (en) * 2017-03-15 2021-08-10 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Schedule processing method and device
CN109118154A (en) * 2017-06-23 2019-01-01 中兴通讯股份有限公司 schedule detection method, terminal and computer readable storage medium
CN110417625B (en) * 2018-04-28 2021-10-08 九阳股份有限公司 A schedule management method based on smart home appliances
CN108989163A (en) * 2018-08-22 2018-12-11 歌尔科技有限公司 A kind of smart machine control method, device and smart machine
KR102740291B1 (en) * 2019-02-13 2024-12-09 삼성전자 주식회사 Apparatus and method for managing schedule in electronic device
CN110443586B (en) * 2019-08-12 2022-05-13 Oppo(重庆)智能科技有限公司 Shared schedule information processing method and device, terminal and storage medium
CN113487272B (en) * 2021-06-02 2022-05-17 荣耀终端有限公司 Schedule activity conflict judgment method, electronic device and storage medium

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20060041460A1 (en) * 2004-08-23 2006-02-23 Aaron Jeffrey A An electronic calendar
CN101479723A (en) * 2006-06-30 2009-07-08 微软公司 Managing family information
EP3375146A1 (en) * 2015-11-11 2018-09-19 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Systems and methods relating to a smart home manager
WO2019051910A1 (en) * 2017-09-18 2019-03-21 广东美的制冷设备有限公司 Interactive schedule reminding method and apparatus, storage medium and smart home system
CN112766913A (en) * 2021-01-22 2021-05-07 广州富港万嘉智能科技有限公司 Intelligent service method based on schedule information and intelligent home system
CN112785268A (en) * 2021-01-22 2021-05-11 广州富港万嘉智能科技有限公司 Intelligent household service method and device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN112950142A (en) * 2021-01-26 2021-06-11 珠海格力电器股份有限公司 Method and device for setting equipment operation schedule, storage medium and terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116009429A (en) 2023-04-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN103856249B (en) Mobile terminal and method of controlling function of mobile terminal
CN102572097B (en) The hand-hold electronic equipments of using state cognition
WO2023083262A1 (en) Multiple device-based method for providing service, and related apparatus and system
CN110688179A (en) A display method and terminal device
US20130245827A1 (en) Method and apparatus for remote monitering
CN111650840A (en) Smart home scene arrangement method and terminal
CN103856916A (en) Information providing method and mobile terminal therefor
WO2023045830A1 (en) Home appliance control method, related apparatus, and system
US20180082035A1 (en) Patient Monitoring System Mobile Software Applicaiton
EP4138377A1 (en) Family schedule fusion method and apparatus
KR102158846B1 (en) Mobile terminal and method for controlling of the mobile terminal
WO2024114170A9 (en) Scene perception method, and device and storage medium
JPWO2018110294A1 (en) Care plan output device, method and system, and monitored person monitoring system
WO2023066008A1 (en) Activity management method and electronic device
CN115883714B (en) Message reply method and related equipment
JP7452524B2 (en) Information processing device and information processing method
JPWO2018110295A1 (en) Care plan output device, method and system, and monitored person monitoring system
WO2022204859A1 (en) Connection configuration method and apparatus
US12406562B2 (en) In-home event intercom and notifications
JP2020129214A (en) Watching device and watching program
Vilches et al. Pervasive sensors network for wellness based-on Raspberry Pi
Maternaghan et al. Programming home care
TW202447603A (en) Information processing device, information processing method and program
WO2026000450A1 (en) Interface display method and apparatus
Accenture Power of android wearable technology

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22882619

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22882619

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1